WO2020038483A1 - 一种眼镜 - Google Patents

一种眼镜 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2020038483A1
WO2020038483A1 PCT/CN2019/102395 CN2019102395W WO2020038483A1 WO 2020038483 A1 WO2020038483 A1 WO 2020038483A1 CN 2019102395 W CN2019102395 W CN 2019102395W WO 2020038483 A1 WO2020038483 A1 WO 2020038483A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
hinge
magnetic
support surface
magnetic element
panel
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2019/102395
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
王跃强
张浩锋
Original Assignee
深圳市韶音科技有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 深圳市韶音科技有限公司 filed Critical 深圳市韶音科技有限公司
Publication of WO2020038483A1 publication Critical patent/WO2020038483A1/zh
Priority to US17/138,956 priority Critical patent/US12013596B2/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • G—PHYSICS
    • G02—OPTICS
    • G02C—SPECTACLES; SUNGLASSES OR GOGGLES INSOFAR AS THEY HAVE THE SAME FEATURES AS SPECTACLES; CONTACT LENSES
    • G02C5/00—Constructions of non-optical parts
    • G02C5/22—Hinges
    • G02C5/2218—Resilient hinges
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G02—OPTICS
    • G02C—SPECTACLES; SUNGLASSES OR GOGGLES INSOFAR AS THEY HAVE THE SAME FEATURES AS SPECTACLES; CONTACT LENSES
    • G02C11/00—Non-optical adjuncts; Attachment thereof
    • G02C11/10—Electronic devices other than hearing aids
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G02—OPTICS
    • G02C—SPECTACLES; SUNGLASSES OR GOGGLES INSOFAR AS THEY HAVE THE SAME FEATURES AS SPECTACLES; CONTACT LENSES
    • G02C5/00—Constructions of non-optical parts
    • G02C5/001—Constructions of non-optical parts specially adapted for particular purposes, not otherwise provided for or not fully classifiable according to technical characteristics, e.g. therapeutic glasses
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G02—OPTICS
    • G02C—SPECTACLES; SUNGLASSES OR GOGGLES INSOFAR AS THEY HAVE THE SAME FEATURES AS SPECTACLES; CONTACT LENSES
    • G02C5/00—Constructions of non-optical parts
    • G02C5/14—Side-members
    • G02C5/143—Side-members having special ear pieces
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G02—OPTICS
    • G02C—SPECTACLES; SUNGLASSES OR GOGGLES INSOFAR AS THEY HAVE THE SAME FEATURES AS SPECTACLES; CONTACT LENSES
    • G02C5/00—Constructions of non-optical parts
    • G02C5/14—Side-members
    • G02C5/16—Side-members resilient or with resilient parts
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G02—OPTICS
    • G02C—SPECTACLES; SUNGLASSES OR GOGGLES INSOFAR AS THEY HAVE THE SAME FEATURES AS SPECTACLES; CONTACT LENSES
    • G02C5/00—Constructions of non-optical parts
    • G02C5/14—Side-members
    • G02C5/20—Side-members adjustable, e.g. telescopic
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G02—OPTICS
    • G02C—SPECTACLES; SUNGLASSES OR GOGGLES INSOFAR AS THEY HAVE THE SAME FEATURES AS SPECTACLES; CONTACT LENSES
    • G02C5/00—Constructions of non-optical parts
    • G02C5/22—Hinges
    • G02C5/2218—Resilient hinges
    • G02C5/2227—Resilient hinges comprising a fixed hinge member and a coil spring
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G02—OPTICS
    • G02C—SPECTACLES; SUNGLASSES OR GOGGLES INSOFAR AS THEY HAVE THE SAME FEATURES AS SPECTACLES; CONTACT LENSES
    • G02C5/00—Constructions of non-optical parts
    • G02C5/22—Hinges
    • G02C5/2218—Resilient hinges
    • G02C5/2254—Resilient hinges comprising elastic means other than coil spring
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04R—LOUDSPEAKERS, MICROPHONES, GRAMOPHONE PICK-UPS OR LIKE ACOUSTIC ELECTROMECHANICAL TRANSDUCERS; DEAF-AID SETS; PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS
    • H04R1/00—Details of transducers, loudspeakers or microphones
    • H04R1/02—Casings; Cabinets ; Supports therefor; Mountings therein
    • H04R1/025—Arrangements for fixing loudspeaker transducers, e.g. in a box, furniture
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04R—LOUDSPEAKERS, MICROPHONES, GRAMOPHONE PICK-UPS OR LIKE ACOUSTIC ELECTROMECHANICAL TRANSDUCERS; DEAF-AID SETS; PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS
    • H04R1/00—Details of transducers, loudspeakers or microphones
    • H04R1/02—Casings; Cabinets ; Supports therefor; Mountings therein
    • H04R1/028—Casings; Cabinets ; Supports therefor; Mountings therein associated with devices performing functions other than acoustics, e.g. electric candles
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04R—LOUDSPEAKERS, MICROPHONES, GRAMOPHONE PICK-UPS OR LIKE ACOUSTIC ELECTROMECHANICAL TRANSDUCERS; DEAF-AID SETS; PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS
    • H04R1/00—Details of transducers, loudspeakers or microphones
    • H04R1/10—Earpieces; Attachments therefor ; Earphones; Monophonic headphones
    • H04R1/1008—Earpieces of the supra-aural or circum-aural type
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04R—LOUDSPEAKERS, MICROPHONES, GRAMOPHONE PICK-UPS OR LIKE ACOUSTIC ELECTROMECHANICAL TRANSDUCERS; DEAF-AID SETS; PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS
    • H04R1/00—Details of transducers, loudspeakers or microphones
    • H04R1/10—Earpieces; Attachments therefor ; Earphones; Monophonic headphones
    • H04R1/1058—Manufacture or assembly
    • H04R1/1066—Constructional aspects of the interconnection between earpiece and earpiece support
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04R—LOUDSPEAKERS, MICROPHONES, GRAMOPHONE PICK-UPS OR LIKE ACOUSTIC ELECTROMECHANICAL TRANSDUCERS; DEAF-AID SETS; PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS
    • H04R25/00—Deaf-aid sets, i.e. electro-acoustic or electro-mechanical hearing aids; Electric tinnitus maskers providing an auditory perception
    • H04R25/02—Deaf-aid sets, i.e. electro-acoustic or electro-mechanical hearing aids; Electric tinnitus maskers providing an auditory perception adapted to be supported entirely by ear
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04R—LOUDSPEAKERS, MICROPHONES, GRAMOPHONE PICK-UPS OR LIKE ACOUSTIC ELECTROMECHANICAL TRANSDUCERS; DEAF-AID SETS; PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS
    • H04R5/00—Stereophonic arrangements
    • H04R5/033—Headphones for stereophonic communication
    • H04R5/0335—Earpiece support, e.g. headbands or neckrests
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04R—LOUDSPEAKERS, MICROPHONES, GRAMOPHONE PICK-UPS OR LIKE ACOUSTIC ELECTROMECHANICAL TRANSDUCERS; DEAF-AID SETS; PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS
    • H04R9/00—Transducers of moving-coil, moving-strip, or moving-wire type
    • H04R9/02—Details
    • H04R9/025—Magnetic circuit
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04R—LOUDSPEAKERS, MICROPHONES, GRAMOPHONE PICK-UPS OR LIKE ACOUSTIC ELECTROMECHANICAL TRANSDUCERS; DEAF-AID SETS; PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS
    • H04R9/00—Transducers of moving-coil, moving-strip, or moving-wire type
    • H04R9/02—Details
    • H04R9/04—Construction, mounting, or centering of coil
    • H04R9/045—Mounting
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04R—LOUDSPEAKERS, MICROPHONES, GRAMOPHONE PICK-UPS OR LIKE ACOUSTIC ELECTROMECHANICAL TRANSDUCERS; DEAF-AID SETS; PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS
    • H04R9/00—Transducers of moving-coil, moving-strip, or moving-wire type
    • H04R9/06—Loudspeakers
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04R—LOUDSPEAKERS, MICROPHONES, GRAMOPHONE PICK-UPS OR LIKE ACOUSTIC ELECTROMECHANICAL TRANSDUCERS; DEAF-AID SETS; PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS
    • H04R1/00—Details of transducers, loudspeakers or microphones
    • H04R1/20—Arrangements for obtaining desired frequency or directional characteristics
    • H04R1/32—Arrangements for obtaining desired frequency or directional characteristics for obtaining desired directional characteristic only
    • H04R1/34—Arrangements for obtaining desired frequency or directional characteristics for obtaining desired directional characteristic only by using a single transducer with sound reflecting, diffracting, directing or guiding means
    • H04R1/345—Arrangements for obtaining desired frequency or directional characteristics for obtaining desired directional characteristic only by using a single transducer with sound reflecting, diffracting, directing or guiding means for loudspeakers
    • H04R1/347—Arrangements for obtaining desired frequency or directional characteristics for obtaining desired directional characteristic only by using a single transducer with sound reflecting, diffracting, directing or guiding means for loudspeakers for obtaining a phase-shift between the front and back acoustic wave
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04R—LOUDSPEAKERS, MICROPHONES, GRAMOPHONE PICK-UPS OR LIKE ACOUSTIC ELECTROMECHANICAL TRANSDUCERS; DEAF-AID SETS; PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS
    • H04R2400/00—Loudspeakers
    • H04R2400/03—Transducers capable of generating both sound as well as tactile vibration, e.g. as used in cellular phones
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04R—LOUDSPEAKERS, MICROPHONES, GRAMOPHONE PICK-UPS OR LIKE ACOUSTIC ELECTROMECHANICAL TRANSDUCERS; DEAF-AID SETS; PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS
    • H04R2460/00—Details of hearing devices, i.e. of ear- or headphones covered by H04R1/10 or H04R5/033 but not provided for in any of their subgroups, or of hearing aids covered by H04R25/00 but not provided for in any of its subgroups
    • H04R2460/13—Hearing devices using bone conduction transducers
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04R—LOUDSPEAKERS, MICROPHONES, GRAMOPHONE PICK-UPS OR LIKE ACOUSTIC ELECTROMECHANICAL TRANSDUCERS; DEAF-AID SETS; PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS
    • H04R2499/00—Aspects covered by H04R or H04S not otherwise provided for in their subgroups
    • H04R2499/10—General applications
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04R—LOUDSPEAKERS, MICROPHONES, GRAMOPHONE PICK-UPS OR LIKE ACOUSTIC ELECTROMECHANICAL TRANSDUCERS; DEAF-AID SETS; PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS
    • H04R25/00—Deaf-aid sets, i.e. electro-acoustic or electro-mechanical hearing aids; Electric tinnitus maskers providing an auditory perception
    • H04R25/60—Mounting or interconnection of hearing aid parts, e.g. inside tips, housings or to ossicles

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of eyeglasses, and in particular, to eyeglasses with hinge components.
  • glasses in daily life such as short-sighted glasses, far-sighted glasses, sunglasses, VR glasses, massage glasses and so on.
  • these glasses have a single function and cannot meet the multiple needs of people at the same time.
  • people often wear sunglasses when going out for sports or traveling but if they want to listen to music at the same time, they need to prepare additional headphones, which is not convenient to carry and store. Therefore, glasses with a headset function bring great convenience to the user.
  • the glasses include: a spectacle frame.
  • the spectacle frame includes a spectacle frame and two spectacle legs.
  • the two spectacle legs are rotatably connected to the spectacle frame.
  • Two speaker components are connected to the two temples respectively through a hinge component on the two temples, and the hinge component can be rotated to change each speaker component relative to the temples to which it is connected
  • the two speaker components include an earphone core and an earphone housing, the earphone housing includes a housing panel facing a human body side and a housing back opposite the housing panel; and At least one of the housings contains a control circuit or a battery that drives the earphone core to vibrate to generate sound.
  • the vibration of the earphone core causes the housing panel and the back of the housing to vibrate.
  • the vibration of the housing panel has In the first phase, the vibration of the back surface of the casing has the second phase, wherein when the frequency of the vibration of the casing panel and the vibration of the rear surface of the casing is 2000 Hz to 3000 Hz, Absolute value of the difference between said first phase and said second phase is less than 60 degrees.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of glasses provided according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic structural diagram of a hinge assembly according to some embodiments in the present application.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of an explosion structure according to some embodiments in the present application.
  • FIG. 4 is a sectional view of the hinge assembly of FIG. 2 along the A-A axis;
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic structural diagram of a hinge assembly according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 6 is an original state diagram of a protective sleeve according to some embodiments in the present application.
  • FIG. 7 is a partial cross-sectional view of an original state of a protective sleeve of a hinge assembly according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 8 is a bending state diagram of a protective sleeve of a hinge assembly according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 9 is a partial cross-sectional view of a folded state of a protection sleeve of a hinge assembly according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 10 is a partial cross-sectional view of glasses provided according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 11 is an enlarged view of a portion A in FIG. 10;
  • FIG. 12 is an enlarged view of a portion B in FIG. 11;
  • FIG. 13 is a partial cross-sectional view of glasses provided according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 14 is an enlarged view of a portion C in FIG. 13;
  • 16 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario and a structure of glasses provided according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • 17 is a schematic diagram of an included angle direction according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 18 is a schematic structural view of a speaker component acting on human skin and bone according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 19 is an angle-relative displacement relationship diagram of a speaker component provided according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • 20 is a schematic diagram of a low-frequency part of a frequency response curve of a speaker component at different angles ⁇ according to some embodiments of the present application;
  • 21 is a schematic longitudinal sectional view of a speaker assembly according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • 22 is a schematic structural diagram of a speaker assembly provided according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 23 is a schematic structural diagram of another speaker component according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 24 is a schematic structural diagram of still another speaker assembly according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • 25 is a schematic structural diagram of a housing of a speaker assembly according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • 26 is a schematic structural diagram of a speaker assembly provided according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 27 is a schematic longitudinal sectional view of a magnetic circuit assembly 2100 according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 28 is a schematic longitudinal sectional view of a magnetic circuit assembly 2600 according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 29 is a schematic longitudinal sectional view of a magnetic circuit assembly 2700 according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 30 is a schematic longitudinal sectional view of a magnetic circuit assembly 2900 according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 31 is a schematic longitudinal sectional view of a magnetic circuit assembly 3000 according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 32 is a schematic longitudinal sectional view of a magnetic circuit assembly 3100 according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 33 is a schematic diagram of transmitting sound through air conduction according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • This modification and change adds environmental sound pickup and processing functions to the speaker module, so that the speaker module can realize the function of a hearing aid.
  • a microphone such as a microphone that can pick up the sound of the surroundings of the user / wearer is added, and the sound is processed (or the electrical signal generated) is transmitted to the speaker component under a certain algorithm. section. That is, the speaker component can be modified to include the function of picking up ambient sounds, and after a certain signal processing, the speaker component can transmit the sound to the user / wearer, thereby realizing the function of the hearing aid.
  • the algorithms mentioned here may include noise cancellation, automatic gain control, acoustic feedback suppression, wide dynamic range compression, active environment recognition, active noise reduction, directional processing, tinnitus processing, multi-channel wide dynamic range compression, and active howling A combination of one or more of suppression, volume control, etc.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of an embodiment of glasses according to the present application.
  • the glasses include: a spectacle frame 10 and a functional component 20.
  • the spectacle frame 10 in the present application may include spectacle frames of various glasses such as nearsightedness, farsightedness, sunglasses, 3D glasses, etc., which is not limited herein.
  • the functional component 20 may be connected with the spectacle frame 10 so that the spectacles further have some other functions or components.
  • the functional component 20 may be a speaker assembly, and may include a bone conduction speaker assembly, an air conduction speaker assembly, and the like.
  • the functional component 20 may be the bone conduction speaker assembly 21, so that the glasses also have the function of the bone conduction speaker assembly 21.
  • the functional component 20 may also be other components, such as a positioning device, which is not limited herein.
  • the spectacle frame 10 may include a spectacle frame 11 and two spectacle legs 12.
  • the spectacle main body 121 and the hinge assembly 122 may be rotatably connected to the spectacle frame 11, and the speaker assembly 21 may pass the hinge assembly 122. Attached to the temple 12.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic structural diagram of an embodiment of a hinge assembly of the present application
  • FIG. 3 is an exploded structural schematic diagram of an embodiment of a hinge assembly of the present application.
  • the hinge assembly 122 of the present application may be used in glasses in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the hinge assembly 122 includes a hinge 30, which is a structure for connecting two solid bodies and allowing relative rotation between the two solid bodies.
  • the hinge assembly 122 in this embodiment is used in the above-mentioned glasses embodiment, the hinge assembly 122 is disposed at an end of the temple main body 121 away from the eyeglass frame 11, and further connects the functional member 20 to the mirror through the hinge 30.
  • the leg body 121 is far from the end of the eyeglass frame 11.
  • the hinge assembly 122 may further include a rod 40 and a fixing member 50.
  • the hinge 30 may include a hinge base 31 and a hinge arm 32.
  • the hinge arm 32 is rotatably connected to the hinge base 31 through a rotation shaft 33. It is easy to understand that the hinge base 31 and the hinge arm 32 may be respectively connected to two components that need to be rotationally connected, so that the two components are rotationally connected together through the rotation shaft 33 of the hinge 30.
  • the hinge seat 31 of the hinge 30 is connected to the rod-shaped member 40.
  • the rod-shaped member 40 may be a partial structure or an overall structure of one of the two members rotationally connected through the hinge 30, or may be one of the two members that need to be rotationally connected to be connected to the hinge 30. Connection structure.
  • the rod-shaped member 40 may be at least a part of the temple main body 121 of the glasses, for example, may be all of the temple main body 121 or the temple main body 121 is far away from the eyeglass frame 11 A part of one end is further provided with the hinge main body 121 through this part of the temple main body 121 at the end of the temple main body 121 away from the eyeglass frame 11.
  • the rod-like member 40 is provided along the length direction with a hinge cavity 41 communicating with the end surface of the rod-like member 40.
  • a side wall of the rod-like member 40 is provided with a first insertion hole 42 communicating with the hinge cavity 41 and a hinge seat.
  • An end of 31 which is remote from the hinge arm 32 is inserted into the hinge cavity 41 from an end surface of the rod-shaped member 40, and is fixed in the hinge cavity 41 by a fixing member 50 inserted in the first insertion hole 42.
  • the hinge cavity 41 communicates with the end surface of the temple main body 121 away from the end of the spectacle frame 11, so that the hinge base 31 is inserted into the hinge cavity 41 to connect the hinge 30 with the temple main body 121.
  • the hinge cavity 41 may be formed during the molding process of the rod-shaped member 40.
  • the material of the rod-shaped member 40 may be rubber or plastic.
  • the hinge cavity 41 may be formed by injection molding.
  • the shape of the hinge cavity 41 is matched with the hinge base 31 so that the hinge base 31 can be accommodated in the hinge cavity 41.
  • the temple main body 121 may be a long straight rod along the length direction.
  • the rod 40 may be a straight rod along the length direction.
  • the hinge cavity 41 is provided in the straight rod.
  • the hinge The seat 31 is matched with the hinge cavity 41 to be accommodated in the hinge cavity 41 so as to realize the installation of the hinge 30.
  • the rod-shaped member 40 may have other shapes such as an arc-shaped rod.
  • the first insertion hole 42 may also be formed during the molding process of the rod-shaped member 40, or may be further formed on the side wall of the rod-shaped member by a method such as drilling after the molding.
  • the shape of the first insertion hole 42 may be circular, and in other embodiments, it may be square, triangular, or other shapes.
  • the shape of the fixing member 50 is matched with the first insertion hole 42 so that the fixing member 50 can be inserted into the first insertion hole 42 from the outside of the rod-like member 40, and further by abutting the side wall of the hinge base 31, or Further penetrate the outer wall of the hinge base 31 to fix the hinge base 31 in the hinge cavity 41 by plugging in or the like.
  • matching threads may be provided on the inner wall of the first insertion hole 42 and the outer wall of the fixing member 50 so that the fixing member 50 can be connected to the first insertion hole 42 by screwing to further connect the hinge seat 31. It is fixed in the hinge cavity 41. Of course, it may also be connected in other ways, for example, through an interference fit between the first insertion hole 42 and the fixing member 50.
  • the hinge arm 32 can also be connected with other components, so that the component can be connected with the rod-shaped member 40 or with the rod-shaped member 40 by mounting the hinge seat 31 in the hinge cavity 41 of the rod-shaped member 40 after the hinge arm 32 is connected.
  • the other members connected to the rod-shaped member 40 can rotate around the rotation shaft 33.
  • the functional member 20 such as the speaker assembly 21
  • the hinge arm 32 is connected to the end of the hinge arm 32 away from the hinge base 31, and is connected to the temple main body 121 away from the eyeglass frame 11 through the hinge 30. Ends.
  • the rod-like member 40 is provided with a hinge cavity 41 communicating with the end surface of the rod-like member 40.
  • the hinge 30 receives the hinge seat 31 in the hinge cavity 41, and further passes the fixing member 50 through the first
  • the insertion hole 42 penetrates the side wall of the rod-shaped member 40 to fix the hinge seat 31 accommodated in the hinge cavity 41 in the hinge cavity 41, so that the hinge 30 can be detached from the rod-shaped member 40 for convenience. Replacement of the hinge 30 or the rod 40.
  • the hinge 30 and the functional member 20 can be detached from the temple main body 121, so that when the functional member 20 or the spectacle frame 11, the temple main body 121 and the like are damaged For easy replacement.
  • the hinge seat 31 is provided with a second insertion hole 311 corresponding to the first insertion hole 42, and the fixing member 50 is further inserted into the second insertion hole 311. Inside.
  • the shape of the second insertion hole 311 matches the shape of the fixing member 50, so that after the fixing member 50 passes through the first insertion hole 42, it is further inserted into the second insertion hole 311 to fix the hinge base 31, so that The sway of the hinge base 31 in the hinge cavity 41 is reduced, so that the hinge 30 is fixed more firmly.
  • the inner wall of the second insertion hole 311 may be provided with matching threads on the outer wall corresponding to the fixing member 50, so that the fixing member 50 And the hinge base 31 is screwed together; or, the outer wall at the position where the inner wall of the second insertion hole 311 and the fixing member 50 correspond to each other is a smooth surface, and the fixing member 50 and the second insertion hole 311 are in interference.
  • the cooperation is not specifically limited here.
  • the second insertion hole 311 can also be provided through both sides of the hinge base 31, so that the fixing member 50 can further penetrate the entire hinge base 31, so as to fix the hinge base 31 more firmly in the hinge cavity 41.
  • FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the hinge assembly 122 along the A-A axis in FIG. 2.
  • the cross-sectional shape of the hinge base 31 and the cross-sectional shape of the hinge cavity 41 are matched in a cross section perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the rod 40 so that the hinge base 31 and the rod 40 are inserted after insertion. Forms a tight fit.
  • the cross-sectional shape of the hinge base 31 and the cross-sectional shape of the hinge cavity 41 may be any shape, as long as the hinge base 31 can be separated from the rod 40 away from the hinge arm 32.
  • the end surface can be inserted into the hinge cavity 41.
  • the first insertion hole 42 is provided on a side wall of the hinge cavity 41 and communicates with the hinge cavity 41 through the side wall of the hinge cavity 41.
  • the cross-sectional shape of the hinge base 31 and the cross-sectional shape of the hinge cavity 41 are both rectangular, and the first insertion hole 42 is perpendicular to one side of the rectangle.
  • the corners of the outer wall of the hinge base 31 or the corners of the inner wall of the hinge cavity 41 may be further rounded, so that the contact between the hinge base 31 and the hinge cavity 41 is more smooth, so that the hinge base 31 Can be smoothly inserted into the hinge cavity 41.
  • the first insertion hole 42 penetrates the side wall of the hinge cavity 41 and communicates with the hinge cavity 41, which can assist in exhausting the internal gas from the first insertion hole 42 through the hinge cavity 41 during the assembly process. Facilitates normal assembly of the hinge 30.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic structural diagram of an embodiment of a hinge assembly of the present application.
  • the hinge assembly 122 further includes a connecting wire 60 disposed outside the hinge 30.
  • connection line 60 may be a connection line 60 having an electrical connection function and / or a mechanical connection function.
  • the hinge assembly 122 is used to connect the functional element 20 to the end of the temple main body 121 away from the eyeglass frame 11, and a control circuit or the like related to the functional element 20 may be provided In the temple main body 121, at this time, a connecting wire 60 is required to electrically connect the functional component 20 and a control circuit in the temple main body 121 together.
  • the connecting wire 60 may be located on one side of the hinge base 31 and the hinge arm 32, and is disposed in the same accommodation space as the hinge 30.
  • the hinge base 31 includes a first end surface 312, and the hinge arm 32 has a second end surface 321 disposed opposite the first end surface 312. It is easy to understand that there is a certain gap between the first end surface 312 and the second end surface 321.
  • the hinge base 31 and the hinge arm 32 can be relatively rotated around the rotation shaft 33. In this embodiment, during the relative rotation of the hinge arm 32 and the hinge base 31, the relative position between the first end surface 312 and the second end surface 321 changes accordingly, so that the gap between the two becomes larger or Get smaller.
  • the gap between the first end surface 312 and the second end surface 321 is always kept larger or smaller than the diameter of the connecting line 60, so that the connecting line 60 located outside the hinge 30 cannot fall between the hinge base 31 and the hinge arm.
  • the relative rotation of 32 it is clamped into the gap between the first end surface 312 and the second end surface 321, thereby reducing the damage of the connecting line 60 by the hinge.
  • the ratio of the gap between the first end surface 312 and the second end surface 321 to the diameter of the connecting wire 60 during the relative rotation of the hinge arm 32 and the hinge base 31 can always be kept greater than 1.5 or less than 0.8, such as greater than 1.5 , 1.7, 1.9, 2.0, etc., or less than 0.8, 0.6, 0.4, 0.2, etc., which are not specifically limited here.
  • FIG. 6 is an original state diagram of the protective sleeve in one embodiment of the hinge assembly of the present application
  • FIG. 7 is an original state diagram of the protective sleeve in one embodiment of the hinge assembly of the present application
  • FIG. 8 is a partial cross-sectional view of a bending state of a protective sleeve in an embodiment of the hinge assembly of the present application
  • FIG. 9 is a partial cross-sectional view of a bending state of the protective sleeve in an embodiment of the hinge assembly of the present application.
  • the hinge assembly 122 may further include a protective sleeve 70.
  • the protective sleeve 70 is sleeved on the periphery of the hinge 30 and is bent along with the hinge 30.
  • the protective sleeve 70 may include a plurality of annular ridge portions 71 disposed at intervals along the length direction of the protective sleeve 70 and two annular ridge portions 71 disposed between the annular ridge portions 71 and used to connect two adjacent ones.
  • the thickness of the pipe wall of the annular ridge portion 71 is greater than the thickness of the pipe wall of the annular connection portion 72.
  • the length direction of the protection sleeve 70 may be consistent with the length direction of the hinge 30, and the protection sleeve 70 may be disposed along the length direction of the hinge base 31 and the hinge arm 32.
  • the protective sleeve 70 may be made of a soft material, such as soft silicone, rubber, or the like.
  • the annular ridge portion 71 may be formed by protruding outwardly from the outer sidewall of the protective sleeve 70, and the shape of the inner sidewall of the protective sleeve 70 corresponding to the annular ridge portion 71 is not specifically limited herein.
  • the inner wall may be smooth, or a recess may be provided on the inner wall at a position corresponding to the annular ridge portion 71.
  • the ring-shaped connecting portion 72 is used to connect adjacent ring-shaped ridge portions 71, and is specifically connected to an edge region of the ring-shaped ridge portion 71 near the inside of the protective sleeve 70, so that the outer side of the protective sleeve 70 can be It is provided in a recessed manner with respect to the annular ridge portion 71.
  • the number of the annular ridge portion 71 and the annular connection portion 72 may be determined according to actual use.
  • the number of the annular ridge portion 71 and the annular connection portion 72 may be determined by the length of the protective sleeve 70.
  • the width of the protective sleeve 70 in the longitudinal direction is set.
  • the pipe wall thicknesses of the annular ridge portion 71 and the annular connection portion 72 refer to the thickness between the inner wall and the outer wall of the protective sleeve 70 corresponding to the annular ridge portion 71 and the annular connection portion 72, respectively. .
  • the tube wall thickness of the annular ridge portion 71 is greater than the tube wall thickness of the annular connection portion 72.
  • the thickness of the tube wall of the annular ridge portion 71 is greater than the thickness of the tube wall of the annular connection portion 72, so that the annular ridge portion 71 is harder than the annular connection portion 72, thereby protecting the sleeve 70.
  • the protective sleeve 70 on the outer side of the bent shape When in the bent state, the protective sleeve 70 on the outer side of the bent shape is in a stretched state, and the annular ridge portion 71 can provide a certain strength support for the protective sleeve 70; at the same time, the inside of the bent state
  • the area of the protective sleeve 70 on one side is squeezed, and the annular ridge 71 can also withstand a certain pressing force, thereby protecting the protective sleeve 70, improving the stability of the protective sleeve 70, and extending the protective sleeve.
  • the life of the tube 70 The life of the tube 70.
  • the shape of the protective sleeve 70 is consistent with the state where the hinge 30 is located.
  • both sides of the protective sleeve 70 along the length direction and rotating around the rotation axis may be stretched or squeezed.
  • the hinge base 31 and the hinge arm 32 of the hinge 30 can only rotate within a range of less than or equal to 180 ° about the rotation axis 33, that is, the protective sleeve 70 can only be bent toward one side , Then one side of the two sides of the protective sleeve 70 in the length direction may be squeezed and the other side may be stretched.
  • the protective sleeve may be changed according to the different forces on the two sides of the protective sleeve 70.
  • the two sides of the tube 70 with different forces are provided with different structures.
  • the annular ridge portion 71 when the protective sleeve 70 is in a bent state, has a width in the longitudinal direction of the protective sleeve 70 that is greater than the direction of the bending when the protective sleeve 70 is formed on the outer side of the bent shape. The width of the inner side of the shape along the length of the protective sleeve 70.
  • increasing the width of the annular ridge 71 in the length direction of the protective sleeve 70 can further increase the strength of the protective sleeve.
  • the angle of the initial included angle between the hinge base 31 and the hinge arm 32 is less than 180 °.
  • the width of the annular ridge portion 71 corresponding to the side of the outer region of the bent shape in the bent state is large, so that the length of the side protective sleeve 70 can be enlarged, and the protective sleeve can be improved.
  • the strength of 70 also reduces the degree of stretching on the stretching side to a certain extent when the protective sleeve 70 is bent; at the same time, the annular ridge portion 71 faces the bend when the protective sleeve 70 is in a bent state
  • the width of the inner side of the folded shape along the length of the protective sleeve 70 is small, which can increase the space of the extruded ring-shaped connecting portion 72 in the length direction of the protective sleeve 70, thereby alleviating the squeeze to a certain extent Press on the side.
  • the width of the annular ridge portion 71 gradually decreases from the side of the outer region facing the bent shape to the side of the inner region facing the bent shape, so that the protective sleeve 70 is in a bent shape.
  • the width toward the outer region side of the bent shape formed by the protective sleeve 70 is greater than the width toward the inner region side of the bent shape.
  • the annular convex ridge portion 71 is provided around the periphery of the protective sleeve 70.
  • one side corresponds to the stretched side, and the other side corresponds to the squeezed side.
  • the width of the annular ridge portion 71 gradually decreases from the side of the outer region facing the bent shape to the side of the inner region facing the bent shape, so that the width is more uniform and can be increased to a certain extent. Protects the stability of the sleeve 70.
  • the annular ridge portion 71 is provided with an inner annular surface inside the protective sleeve 70 facing the outer region side of the bent shape formed by the protective sleeve 70 when the protective sleeve 70 is in a bent state. Groove 711.
  • the groove 711 in this embodiment is provided along a length direction perpendicular to the protective sleeve 70, so that the corresponding annular ridge portion 71 can be appropriately adjusted when the protective sleeve 70 is stretched in the length direction. stretch.
  • the protective sleeve 70 when the protective sleeve 70 is in a bent state, the protective sleeve 70 facing the outer side of the bent shape formed by the protective sleeve 70 is in a stretched state.
  • the protective sleeve 70 is further in a corresponding loop shape.
  • a groove 711 is provided on the inner ring surface inside the protective sleeve 70 corresponding to the ridge portion 71, so that when the side protective sleeve is stretched, the annular ridge portion 71 corresponding to the groove 711 can be appropriately extended to take part Stretching, thereby reducing the tensile force experienced by the side protective sleeve, thereby protecting the protective sleeve 70.
  • the annular ridge portion 71 on the side facing the inner region of the bent shape may not be provided with a groove 711 on the inner side wall of the corresponding protective sleeve 70 .
  • the width of the groove 71 along the longitudinal direction of the protective sleeve 70 is gradually reduced from the side of the outer region facing the bent shape to the side of the inner region facing the bent shape, so that The inner side wall of the protective sleeve 70 corresponding to the annular ridge 71 on the inner side of the inner region is not provided with a groove 711.
  • the protective sleeve 70 may be different from the temple main body 121 provided on both sides of the protective sleeve 70 in the length direction. And the functional pieces 20 are connected together.
  • the protective sleeve 70 can also be integrally formed for other structures in the glasses, such as the protective cover of some components, so that the glasses are more closed and integrated.
  • the hinge assembly 122 in the embodiment of the hinge assembly in the present application can be used not only for the glasses in the embodiment of the glasses of the present application, but also in other devices, and the hinge assembly 122 can also include a rod shape
  • Other components other than the member 40, the fixing member 50, the connecting wire 60, the protective sleeve 70, and the like are associated with the hinge 30 to achieve the corresponding functions.
  • FIG. 10 is a partial cross-sectional view of an embodiment of the hinge of the present application
  • FIG. 11 is an enlarged view of part A in FIG. 10
  • FIG. 12 is part B in FIG.
  • FIG. 13 is a partial cross-sectional view of an embodiment of the hinge of the present application
  • FIG. 14 is an enlarged view of a portion C in FIG. 13.
  • hinge 30 in the hinge embodiment of the present application can be used in the glasses in the glasses embodiment of the present application, and can also be used in the hinge assembly 122 in the hinge assembly embodiment of the present application. It can also be used in other devices. No specific restrictions are made here.
  • the hinge arm 32 of the hinge 30 has a first support surface 322 and a second support surface 323 connected to each other.
  • the hinge 30 further includes a support member 34 and an elastic member 35.
  • the support member 34 is movably disposed on the hinge base 31 and has a third support surface 341.
  • the elastic member 35 is used for elastically biasing the support member 34 toward the hinge arm 32, so that the third support surfaces 341 can be elastically abutted respectively.
  • the support member 34 when the hinge arm 32 is rotated relative to the hinge base 31 by an external force, the support member 34 is pushed by the connection point 324 of the first support surface 322 and the second support surface 323 to overcome the elastic bias of the elastic member 35.
  • the reverse movement causes the third support surface 341 to switch from one of the first support surface 322 and the second support surface 323 to the other of the first support surface 322 and the second support surface 323. Those flexibly abut.
  • the support member 34 is connected to the end of the elastic member 35 facing the hinge arm 32, and the third support surface 341 faces the side of the hinge arm 32.
  • the hinge arm 32 is exposed to external forces around the rotation axis 33 relative to the hinge base.
  • the third supporting surface 341 can be pushed so that the supporting member 34 presses the elastic member 35, and further elastically biases under the action of the elastic member 35.
  • the support member 34 may not be connected to the elastic member 35 but only abuts on one side of the support member 34 as long as the support member 34 can achieve the above-mentioned elastic bias.
  • the first support surface 322 and the second support surface 323 are respectively two sides of the hinge arm 32 adjacent to each other and at least partially parallel to the central axis of the rotating shaft 33, or part of the two sides.
  • the hinge arm 32 rotates relative to the hinge base 31
  • the first support surface 322 and the second support surface 323 rotate with the hinge arm 32 about the rotation axis 33, so that different sides of the hinge arm 32 face the hinge base 31, and thus the hinge arm 32 faces each other.
  • the hinge base 31 can have different relative positional relationships.
  • the elastic member 35 is a member capable of providing elastic force and being capable of being compressed in the direction of the elastic force to provide a certain compression space.
  • the elastic member 35 may be a spring, and one end of the spring abuts the support member 34.
  • the elastic member 35 resists the support member 34 and compresses so that Provide space in the direction of the third support surface 341 of the support member 34, so that when the relative position of the rotation shaft 33 is not changed, there is still enough space for the different sides of the hinge arm 32 to rotate to the rotation shaft 33 and the third support surface Between 341.
  • the hinge arm 32 rotates relative to the hinge base 31, the relative position of the rotating shaft 33 does not change, and the contact position of the hinge arm 32 and the third support surface 341 of the hinge base 31 changes.
  • the distance from the position to the rotation axis 33 is different. Therefore, when the different positions of the hinge arm 32 such as the first support surface 322 and the second support surface 323 are in contact with the third support surface 341, the required rotation axis 33 to The space between the contact points of the hinge arm 32 and the third support surface 341 is different.
  • the space provided by the compression of the elastic member 35 may be limited.
  • first support surface 322 and the second support surface 323 may both be planes, and the distance from the rotation shaft 33 to the connection point 324 of the two is greater than the distance from the rotation shaft 33 to the first support surface 322 and to the first support surface 322.
  • the hinge 30 may have two relatively stable states: the third supporting surface 341 abuts against the first supporting surface 322, and the third supporting surface 341 abuts against the second supporting surface 323.
  • first support surface 322 and the second support surface 323 may also be curved surfaces with a certain radian, or may even include different sub-support surfaces, as long as the distance between the hinge arm 32 and the hinge base 31 can be made. It suffices that the positional relationship of at least two corresponding relatively stable states is not specifically limited here.
  • the hinge arm 32 may be provided with other support surfaces so that when the hinge arm 32 receives an external force and rotates relative to the rotation axis 33 and the hinge base 31, different support surfaces on the hinge arm 32 and the third The supporting surface 341 is elastically abutted, so that the hinge arm 32 and the hinge base 31 have different relative positional relationships, which are not specifically limited herein.
  • the initial state is an example where the first support surface 322 abuts the third support surface 341 of the support member 34 as shown in FIG. 11 and FIG. 12.
  • the elastic member 35 may have elastic compression deformation, or may be in an original natural state, which is not limited herein.
  • connection point 324 Since the distance from the connection point 324 to the rotation shaft 33 is greater than the distance from the first support surface 322 to the rotation shaft 33, the connection point 324 abuts the support member 34 and pushes the support member 34 to move toward the elastic member. The movement of the direction of 35 causes the elastic member 35 to overcome the thrust and generate compression. And when the hinge arm 32 is further stressed, the connection point 324 gradually approaches the area between the rotation shaft 33 and the third support surface 341.
  • the distance between the rotation shaft 33 and the third support surface 341 gradually increases; It is easy to understand that when the connecting line of the connection point 324 and the rotation shaft 33 is perpendicular to the third support surface 341, the distance from the rotation shaft 33 to the third support surface 341 is equal to the rotation shaft 33 to the connection on a cross section perpendicular to the center axis of the rotation shaft 33.
  • the rotation axis 33 is farthest from the third support surface 341 at this time; if at this time, if the hinge 30 continues to be forced, the distance from the rotation axis 33 to the third support surface 341 will gradually decrease, so that The required compression space of the elastic member 35 is reduced, and then the elastic member 35 gradually releases the elastic force and recovers, until the connection point 324 leaves the third support surface 341 and the second support surface 323 abuts against the third support surface 341, thereby Switching from abutting the first support surface 322 and the third support surface 341 to the second support surface 323 and the third support surface 341 is realized.
  • the second support surface 323 is in contact with the third support surface 341 of the support member 34, and the first support surface 322 is in contact with the third support surface 341 of the support member 34. 13 and 14) are similar to the above process.
  • the hinge 30 in this embodiment can be applied to the hinge assembly 122 in the glasses embodiment of the present application.
  • the hinge assembly 122 drives the speaker assembly 21 to switch between a first relatively fixed position and a second relatively fixed position relative to the temple main body 121, and can be fitted to the user when the speaker assembly 21 is in the first relatively fixed position.
  • the auricle is a part of the external ear and is mainly composed of cartilage.
  • the speaker assembly 21 may be a bone conduction speaker assembly.
  • the cartilage of the auricle can be used to transmit bone conduction sound / vibration. Placing the bone conduction speaker components on the back of the auricle can improve the sound quality and reduce the impact on the ear canal during the sound transmission.
  • the distance between the rotation shaft 33 and the connection point 324 is greater than the vertical distance from the first support surface 322 and the second support surface 323, so that the third support surface 341 is separated from the first support surface 322 and the second support.
  • the state of the hinge 30 jumps to a certain degree during the process of one of the surfaces 323 being elastically abutted to the other of the first supporting surface 322 and the second supporting surface 323.
  • the ratio between the maximum distance h1 of the rotation shaft 33 to the connection 324 and the shortest distance h2 of the rotation shaft 33 to the first support surface 322 in a cross section perpendicular to the central axis of the rotation shaft 33 is between 1.1 and 1.5. between.
  • the maximum distance h1 between the rotation shaft 33 and the connection point 324 may be greater than that of the rotation shaft 33 to the first by disposing the rotation shaft 33 away from the second support surface 323 and close to one side of the hinge arm 32 opposite to the second support surface 323.
  • the shortest distance h2 of the support surface 322 further satisfies the above ratio.
  • setting the ratio of h1 to h2 to be between 1.1 and 1.5 can enable the third support surface 341 to switch from elastic contact with the first support surface 322 to elastic contact with the second support surface 323
  • the hinge 30 has a relatively obvious jump, so that during use, the user has a relatively obvious feel when pulling the hinge 30, and at the same time, the jump state is not too abrupt, making it difficult for the user to switch the state of the hinge 30.
  • the ratio of h1 to h2 may also be between 1.2 and 1.4. Specifically, the ratio of h1 to h2 may also be 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, etc., which is not specifically limited here.
  • the position of the first support surface 322 and the second support surface 323 on the hinge arm 32 will affect the hinge arm when the third support surface 341 is in contact with one of the first support surface 322 or the second support surface 323.
  • the angle of the included angle between 32 and the hinge base 31, therefore, the positions of the first support surface 322 and the second support surface 323 on the hinge arm 32 can be set differently according to specific usage requirements.
  • the angle between the hinge arm 32 and the hinge base 31 is as shown in FIG. 9 and FIG. 12.
  • ⁇ 1 is the hinge arm 32 and the hinge base when the third support surface 341 is in contact with the first support surface 322.
  • the angle ⁇ 2 between 31 is the angle between the hinge arm 32 and the hinge base 31 when the third support surface 341 and the second support surface 323 abut.
  • the hinge arm 32 and the hinge base 31 each have a certain length.
  • the hinge arm 32 is provided on an end side in the length direction of the hinge base 31.
  • the first support surface 322 is provided in the length direction of the hinge arm 32.
  • the second support surface 323 is disposed at one end in the width direction of the hinge arm 32 and is disposed parallel to the central axis of the rotation shaft 33.
  • the angle between the hinge arm 32 and the hinge base 31 is the largest, and the third supporting surface 341 and the second supporting surface 323 elastically abut.
  • the angle between the hinge arm 32 and the hinge base 31 is the smallest, so that when the third support surface 341 is switched from elastic contact with the first support surface 322 to elastic contact with the second support surface 323, the hinge base 31 and The included angle between the hinge arms 32 decreases from ⁇ 1 to ⁇ 2.
  • the setting of the ratio between h1 and h2 can also make the third support surface When 341 and the first support surface 322 elastically abut, the hinge arm 32 will not or hardly reduce the angle between the hinge arm 32 and the hinge base 31 spontaneously due to its own gravity.
  • the angle ⁇ 3 between the first support surface 322 and the second support surface 323 is an obtuse angle.
  • the first support surface 322 and the third support surface 341 are elastically abutted to a state where the second support surface 323 and the third support surface 341 are elastically abutted
  • the first support surface The smaller the angle ⁇ 3 between 322 and the second support surface 323, the larger the relative rotation angle between the hinge base 31 and the hinge arm 32 when the state is switched, that is, when the hinge base 31 is fixed, The user needs to move the hinge arm 32 by a relatively large angle to be able to switch the state of the hinge 30, so that the user is laborious to use and brings inconvenience to the user.
  • the hinge arm 32 has a certain length, and the first support surface 322 is disposed at one end in the length direction of the hinge arm 32, and the second support surface 323 is disposed adjacent to the first support surface 322 in the width direction of the hinge arm 32 on. Generally, the first support surface 322 and the second support surface 323 are vertically arranged. At this time, when the hinge 30 is switched between the above two states, the hinge arm 32 and the hinge base 31 need to be pulled relative to each other by 90 °.
  • the angle ⁇ 3 between the first support surface 322 and the second support surface 323 is an obtuse angle, so when the hinge 30 is switched between the two states
  • the required relative pulling angle of the hinge arm 32 and the hinge base 31 is less than 90 °, so as to provide convenience to users to a certain extent.
  • the hinge 30 in this embodiment is used in the glasses embodiment of the present application, the hinge 30 is used to connect the temple main body 121 and the speaker assembly 21.
  • the speaker assembly 21 may be a bone conduction speaker assembly.
  • the hinge 30 when the hinge 30 is in the second state where the second support surface 323 and the third support surface 341 elastically abut, the speaker assembly 21 is in a first relatively fixed position to fit the back of the auricle of the user.
  • the hinge 30 is on the first support surface 322 and the first In the first state where the three support surfaces 341 are elastically abutted, the hinge arm 32 and the connected speaker assembly 21 form a certain angle, so that when the user wears glasses, the hinge arm 32 and the connected speaker assembly 21 can be located behind the user's ear And it is arranged in the direction of the user's ear, so that it can play a certain blocking and fixing role on the glasses, and it is not easy to fall from the user's head.
  • the specific angle of the angle ⁇ 3 between the first support surface 322 and the second support surface 323 can be set according to actual needs.
  • the included angle is too large, the included angle between the hinge arm 32 and the function piece 20 connected to the end of the hinge arm 32 away from the hinge base 31 and the hinge base 31 will be small, so that when the user wears the hinge The arm 32 and the function piece 20 will be too close to the user's ear, which will cause pressure on the user's ear and reduce the user's comfort.
  • the included angle is too small, on the one hand, the user will move the speaker assembly 21 to make it in the first place.
  • the required angle is too large, which is inconvenient for the user.
  • the angle formed between the temple main body 121 and the hinge 30 and the speaker assembly 21 It is small and difficult to block and fix the glasses, so that when the user wears the glasses, the glasses are easily dropped from the front side of the user's head.
  • the specific angle of the included angle between the first support surface 322 and the second support surface 323 may be set according to the head shape of the user.
  • the angle ⁇ 3 between the first support surface 322 and the second support surface 323 is between 100 ° and 120 ° on a cross section perpendicular to the central axis of the rotating shaft 33. Specifically, it may be 100 °, 110 °, 120 °, or the like.
  • the setting of this angle enables the user to wear glasses and the speaker module 21 in the first relatively fixed position, so that the speaker module 21 is not too close to the user's ears to cause discomfort to the user's ears. There is no need to turn the hinge too much when switching the relative position, which is convenient for users.
  • the third support surface 341 is switched from elastic contact with one of the first support surface 322 and the second support surface 323 to the other of the first support surface 322 and the second support surface 323.
  • the connection point 324 between the first support surface 322 and the second support surface 323 abuts the third support surface 341, and pushes the support member 34 to move backwards against the elastic bias of the elastic member 35.
  • the connection point 324 gradually abuts against the third supporting surface.
  • connection point 324 always abuts and interacts with the third support surface 341, and the shape of the connection point 324 will have a certain effect on the state switching process.
  • connection point 324 has a relatively sharp angle, so that when the user pulls the hinge base 31 and / or the hinge arm 32 to perform the state of the hinge 30 .
  • the connection point 324 is in contact with the third support surface 341 and the connection point 324 is in contact with the first support surface 322 and the second support surface 323 for switching, the buffer is small, the switching is abrupt, and The feel of the movable hinge 30 is poor; on the other hand, the connection point 324 is relatively sharp, which will cause certain wear to the third support surface 341 during repeated switching processes.
  • connection point 324 is arc-shaped on a cross section perpendicular to the central axis of the rotating shaft 33.
  • connection between the first support surface 322 and the second support surface 323 is an arc surface connection, and during the state switching process of the hinge 30, the connection point 324 abutting the third support surface 341 is relatively smooth, so that the user can pull
  • the hinge 30 has a better feel and can reduce damage to the third support surface 341 during repeated switching processes.
  • connection point 324 is arc-shaped, and the curvature of the arc is different, and the effects brought by it are also different.
  • the specific curvature value needs to be set in combination with the actual use situation.
  • the curvature of the arc is between 5 and 30, and may specifically be 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, etc., which is not limited herein.
  • the curvature of the connection point 324 provided by the arc can enable the user to pull the hinge 30 so that the speaker assembly is at the first relative position.
  • the connection point 324 provided by the arc
  • the third support surface 341 is provided such that an external force required when the third support surface 341 is switched from being elastically abutted with the first support surface 322 to being elastically abutted with the second support surface 323 is different from that The three supporting surfaces 341 are switched from elastic contact with the second support surface 323 to external force required when elastic contact with the first support surface 322.
  • the hinge 30 corresponding to different states of the hinge 30 or the structure to which the hinge 30 is connected have different functions, or due to the position of the hinge 30, a certain state is caused. It is not convenient for the user to apply force when switching the other state, and when the user switches the state of the hinge 30, it is necessary to distinguish the strength of the hinge 30 to facilitate the user to apply force, or to distinguish the two types for the user.
  • the hinge state provides an intuitive feel and more.
  • the switching of the state of the hinge 30 will drive the speaker assembly 21 between the first relatively fixed position and the second relatively fixed position relative to the temple main body 121.
  • the two relatively fixed positions correspond to the two situations where the user uses the speaker assembly 21 and the user does not use the speaker assembly 21, and when the user wears glasses, the hand exerts force on the back of the head to switch between the two states.
  • the degree of difficulty of the force is not the same. Therefore, correspondingly, the switching of different states is designed to require the application of different external forces, which can be used by the user.
  • the third supporting surface 341 when the third supporting surface 341 is switched from being elastically abutted with the first supporting surface 322 to being elastically abutting with the second supporting surface 323, it corresponds to relatively fixing the speaker assembly 21 by the second The position is moved to the first relatively fixed position so as to fit on the back of the auricle of the user.
  • the third support surface 341 is provided such that the external force required when the third support surface 341 is switched from the elastic abutment with the first support surface 322 to the second abutment surface 323 is less than The third support surface 341 is switched from an elastic contact with the second support surface 323 to an external force required when the third support surface 341 is elastically contacted with the first support surface 322.
  • the third support surface 341 needs to be switched from elastic contact with the first support surface 322 to elastic contact with the second support surface 323, and
  • the third support surface 341 needs to be switched from elastic contact with the second support surface 323 to elastic contact with the third support surface 341.
  • the user uses the speaker module 21 The force required to be applied at this time is smaller than the force required to use the speaker assembly 21 without using the speaker assembly 21, so that the user can use the function of the speaker assembly 21 of the glasses to a certain extent.
  • the connection place 324 initially contacts the first position 3411 of the third support surface 341.
  • the connection point 324 initially contacts at The second position 3412 of the third support surface 341.
  • the distance d1 between the contact point of the first position 3411 with the elastic member 35 and the support member 34 along the elastic biasing direction of the elastic member 35 is smaller than the second position in a cross section perpendicular to the central axis of the rotating shaft 33. The distance d2 between 3412 and the contact point in the direction of the elastic bias.
  • connection point 324 is located near one end of the third support surface 341, and the third support surface 341 and the second support surface 323 elastically resist.
  • connection point 324 is located near the other end of the third support surface 341. Therefore, the above-mentioned first position 3411 and second position 3412 are respectively located at two ends near the third support surface 341. That is, in this embodiment, the distances between the positions of the third support surface 341 of the support member 34 near the two ends and the contact points of the elastic member 35 and the support member 34 in the elastic biasing direction of the elastic member 35 are different. The distance corresponding to the second position 3412 is smaller than the distance corresponding to the first position 3411.
  • the connection point 324 does not immediately abut the third support surface 341 and is received by the elastic member.
  • the reaction force of 35 is gradually abutted against the third support surface 341 during the switching process and is subject to the reaction force of the elastic member 35; and the third support surface 341 is elastically abutted from the first support surface 322 to the second support surface 322.
  • connection point 324 When the supporting surface 323 switches elastically, the connection point 324 initially abuts the third supporting surface 341 and receives the reaction force of the elastic member 35, or at least elastically abuts against the second supporting surface 323 with respect to the third supporting surface 341.
  • the switching of the abutting contact with the first supporting surface 322 is to be received by the reaction force of the elastic member 35 early. Therefore, in this case, when the hinge 30 is switched from the elastic abutment with the first support surface 322 to the elastic abutment with the second support surface 323, the required force is small, so that the user can use the speaker assembly 21 when using the speaker assembly 21.
  • the force required to move the speaker assembly 21 is relatively small, which is convenient for users.
  • the third support surface 341 includes a first sub-support surface 3413 and a second sub-support surface 3414.
  • the first position 3411 is provided at the first sub-support surface 3413
  • the second position 3412 is provided at the second ⁇ Support surface 3414. That is, the first sub-supporting surface 3413 and the second sub-supporting surface 3414 are respectively disposed at positions close to both ends of the third support surface 341.
  • the second sub-support surface 3414 may be a flat surface. Specifically, when the first support surface 322 or the second support surface 323 and the third support surface 341 elastically abut, the second sub-support surface 3414 may be The first support surface 322 or the second support surface 323 is parallel.
  • the first sub-support surface 3413 may be a flat surface or an arc surface, which is not limited herein.
  • first sub-supporting surface 3413 and the second sub-supporting surface 3414 are not located on the same plane, the first sub-supporting surface 3413 is inclined with respect to the second sub-supporting surface 3414, and the angle between the two may not be greater than 10 °, for example, may be not more than 2 °, 4 °, 6 °, 8 °, 10 °, and the like.
  • the first sub-supporting surface 3413 is disposed in a direction away from the hinge arm 32, so that the contact point of the first position 3411 with the elastic member 35 and the support member 34 is along the elastic member in a cross section perpendicular to the central axis of the rotation shaft 33.
  • the distance in the elastically biased direction of 35 is smaller than the distance between the second position 3412 and the contact point in the elastically biased direction.
  • the angle between the first sub-support surface 3413 and the second sub-support surface 3414 is between the two. The angle between the plane where the intersection is tangent to the first sub-support surface 3413 and the second sub-support surface 3414.
  • FIG. 15 is an exploded structural view of an embodiment of the hinge of the present application.
  • the hinge base 31 includes a base body 313 and first and second lugs 314 and 315 protruding from the base body 313 and spaced apart from each other
  • the hinge arm 32 includes an arm body 325 and a protrusion from the arm body 325
  • the third lug 326 is provided, and the third lug 326 is inserted into the space between the first lug 314 and the second lug 315 and is rotatably connected to the first lug 314 and the second lug 315 through the rotating shaft 33.
  • the first support surface 322 and the second support surface 323 are disposed on the third lug 326.
  • the support member 34 is at least partially disposed in the interval region and is located on the side of the third lug 326 facing the seat body 313 on the seat body 313.
  • An accommodating cavity 3121 is provided in communication with the interval region.
  • the elastic member 35 is disposed in the accommodating cavity 3121 and elastically biases the support member 34 toward the third lug 326.
  • first lugs 314, the second lugs 315, and the third lugs 326 may be respectively provided with corresponding first through holes, second through holes, and third through holes in the same axial direction.
  • the inner diameter of each through hole can be not less than the outer diameter of the rotating shaft 33, so that when the rotating shaft 33 passes through the corresponding through hole, the hinge base 31 where the first lug 314 and the second lug 315 are located can be connected to the third lug
  • the hinge arms 32 where 326 is located are rotationally connected together.
  • first support surface 322 and the second support surface 323 are both disposed on the third lug 326 and are parallel to the central axis of the rotation shaft 33, so that the hinge arm 32 surrounds the rotation shaft 33 relative to the hinge base 31.
  • both the first support surface 322 and the second support surface 323 may enter the space between the first lug 314 and the second lug 315.
  • the supporting member 34 is located between the first lug 314 and the second lug 315 of the seat body 313, and the third supporting surface 341 of the supporting member 34 is disposed toward the third lug 326.
  • the elastic member 35 is completely disposed in the accommodating cavity 3121, and is in contact with the support member 34 on a side facing a spaced region between the first lug 314 and the second lug 315.
  • an area of the support member 34 near the elastic member 35 is at least partially located in the accommodation cavity 3121.
  • the shape of the portion of the support member 34 located in the accommodation cavity 3121 matches the shape of the accommodation cavity 3121, so that when the elastic member 35 elastically biases the support member 34, the support member 34 is located in the accommodation cavity 3121. A part can slide stably in the receiving cavity 3121.
  • the cross-sectional area of the receiving cavity 3121 is smaller than the cross-sectional area of the space between the first lug 314 and the second lug 315 in a cross section perpendicular to the length direction of the hinge base 31.
  • the support member 34 The shape of the area outside the accommodation cavity 3121 matches the space area, so that when the support member 34 moves toward the elastic member 35 side, it does not all enter the accommodation cavity 3121.
  • the cross-sectional shape of the receiving cavity 3121 may be the same as the interval between the first lug 314 and the second lug 315 in a cross section perpendicular to the length direction of the hinge base 31.
  • the support member 34 can be completely accommodated in the accommodation cavity 3121, so that when the support member 34 receives the pushing action, it slides in the entire accommodation cavity 3121.
  • the first end surface 312 of the hinge base 31 is a hinge arm facing the first lug 314 and the second lug 315
  • An end surface of 32, a third lug 326 protruding toward the arm body 325 is located in a space between the first lug 314 and the second lug 315, so that the first lug 314 and the second lug 315
  • the first end surface 312 is disposed toward the arm body 325.
  • the arm body 325 further protrudes from the third lug 326 to form a first end 321 and a second end surface 321 of the second lug 315 facing the hinge base 31.
  • the gap between the first end surface 312 of the first and second lugs 314 and 315 and the second end surface 321 of the arm body 325 is always Larger or smaller than the diameter of the connecting wire 60 so that the connecting wire 60 will not be caught between the first and second lugs 314 and 315 and the arm body 325 during the relative rotation of the hinge base 31 and the hinge arm 32, and further The damage to the connecting wire 60 by the hinge 30 is reduced.
  • the gap between the second end surface 321 of the first and second lugs 314 and 315 and the first end surface 312 of the arm body 325 is always during the relative rotation of the hinge arm 32 and the hinge base 31. It is kept much larger or smaller than the diameter of the connecting wire 60, thereby further reducing the damage of the connecting wire 60 by the hinge 30.
  • the gap between the first end surface 312 and the second end surface 321 may be a uniform gap of the same size, so that they all meet the above conditions that are larger or smaller than the diameter of the connecting line 60; or in another In the embodiment, only the gaps at the positions where the two end faces are close to the connection line 60 may be greater than or smaller than the diameter of the connection wire 60, and the gaps at other positions on both end faces may not be required to satisfy the above conditions.
  • the end faces of the first and second lugs 314 and 315 facing the hinge arm 32 and the end faces of the arm body 325 facing the hinge base 31 At least one may be chamfered so that the position of the gap between the hinge arm 32 and the hinge base 31 near the connection line 60 is always kept larger than the diameter of the connection line 60 during relative rotation.
  • the chamfer setting may be either a fillet or a direct chamfer.
  • the hinge in the above-mentioned hinge embodiment in the present application may be applied to the hinge assembly embodiment of the present application, but it is not limited. In other embodiments, it may also be applied to other hinge assemblies, or two components to be connected in rotation. direct connection.
  • the above description of the hinge assembly of the glasses is only a specific example, and should not be considered as the only feasible implementation.
  • the cross-sectional shapes of the hinge base 31 and the hinge cavity 41 may be circular, oval, trapezoidal, or the like. Such deformations are all within the protection scope of this application.
  • FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario and a structure of a speaker component provided by some embodiments of the present application. Please refer to FIG. 16 and FIG. 1.
  • the schematic diagram of the mechanism shown in FIG. 16 is equivalent to the speaker assembly 21 in FIG. 1.
  • the following uses the bone conduction speaker component as an example to explain the application scenario and structure of the speaker component device. What needs to be known is that the air conduction speaker component can also replace the bone conduction speaker component and achieve a similar bone conduction speaker component. Functions. In some embodiments, as shown in FIG.
  • the bone conduction speaker component may include a headphone core 101, a transmission component 102, and a panel 103 (the panel 103 may also be referred to as a shell panel, which is the side of the movement case facing the human body). Panel), and the case 104.
  • the housing 104 may include a housing back and a housing side.
  • the headphone core 101 can transmit the vibration signal to the panel 103 and / or the casing 104 through the transmission component 102, thereby transmitting sound to the human body through contact with the panel 103 or the casing 104 and human skin.
  • the panel 103 and / or the housing 104 of the bone conduction speaker assembly may be in contact with human skin at the tragus, thereby transmitting sound to the human body.
  • the panel 103 and / or the housing 104 may also be in contact with human skin on the back side of the auricle.
  • the straight line B (or the vibration direction of the driving device) of the driving force generated by the headphone core 101 has an included angle ⁇ with the normal line A of the panel 103. In other words, straight line B is not parallel to straight line A.
  • the panel has an area in contact with or against the user's body, such as human skin. It should be understood that when the panel is covered with other materials (such as soft materials such as silicone) to enhance the user's wearing comfort, the relationship between the panel and the user's body is not direct contact, but against each other.
  • the bone conduction speaker assembly is worn on the user's body, the entire area of the panel is in contact with or against the user's body. In some embodiments, after the bone conduction speaker assembly is worn on the user's body, a partial area of the panel is in contact with or against the user's body.
  • the area on the panel for contact or abutment with the user's body may occupy more than 50% of the entire panel area, and more preferably, it may occupy more than 60% of the panel area.
  • the area on the panel that comes into contact with or abuts the user's body can be flat or curved.
  • the normal thereof when the area on the panel for contacting or abutting the user's body is a plane, the normal thereof satisfies the general definition of the normal, that is, a dashed line perpendicular to the plane.
  • its normal when the area on the panel for contacting or abutting the user's body is a curved surface, its normal is the average normal of the area. Among them, the definition of the average normal is as follows:
  • the curved surface is a quasi-plane close to a plane, that is, a surface whose angle between the normal of any point in at least 50% of the area and its average normal is smaller than a set threshold.
  • the set threshold is less than 10 °. In some embodiments, the set threshold may be further less than 5 °.
  • the line B where the driving force is located and the normal line A 'of the area on the panel 103 for contact or abutment with the user's body have the included angle ⁇ .
  • the value range of the included angle ⁇ may be 0 ⁇ ⁇ 180 °, and further the value range may be 0 ⁇ ⁇ 180 ° and not equal to 90 °.
  • the setting line B has a positive direction pointing out of the bone conduction speaker module, and the setting line 103's normal A (or the normal line A 'of the contact surface of the panel 103 with the human skin) also has pointing bone conduction.
  • the angle ⁇ formed by the normal line A or A ′ and the straight line B in the positive direction is an acute angle, that is, 0 ⁇ ⁇ 90 °. More descriptions of the normal A and the normal A 'can be found in FIG. 18 and related descriptions, and will not be repeated here.
  • FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram of an included angle direction provided by some embodiments of the present application.
  • the driving force generated by the driving device has a component in the first quadrant and / or the third quadrant of the XOY plane coordinate system.
  • the XOY plane coordinate system is a reference coordinate system.
  • the origin O is located on the contact surface between the panel and / or the shell and the human body after the bone conduction speaker assembly is worn on the human body.
  • the X axis is parallel to the human body coronal axis and the Y axis is The sagittal axis of the human body is parallel, and the positive direction of the X axis is toward the outside of the human body, and the positive direction of the Y axis is toward the front of the human body.
  • the quadrant should be understood as four regions divided by the horizontal axis (such as the X axis) and the vertical axis (such as the Y axis) in the plane rectangular coordinate system, and each region is called a quadrant. The quadrant is centered on the origin and the X and Y axes are the dividing lines.
  • the upper right (the area enclosed by the positive semi-axis of the X axis and the positive semi-axis of the Y axis) is called the first quadrant, and the upper left (the area enclosed by the negative semi-axis of the X axis and the positive semi-axis of the Y axis) is called The second quadrant, the lower left (the area enclosed by the negative semi-axis of the X axis and the negative semi-axis of the Y axis) is called the third quadrant, and the lower right (the positive semi-axis of the X axis is enclosed by the negative semi-axis of the Y axis) Area) is called the fourth quadrant.
  • the points on the coordinate axis do not belong to any quadrant.
  • the driving force in this embodiment may be directly located in the first quadrant and / or the third quadrant of the XOY plane coordinate system, or the driving force is directed in other directions, but in the XOY plane coordinate system,
  • the projection or component in the first quadrant and / or the third quadrant is not 0, and the projection or component in the Z-axis direction may be 0 or not 0.
  • the Z axis is perpendicular to the XOY plane and passes through the origin O.
  • the minimum included angle ⁇ between the straight line where the driving force is located and the normal on the panel that is in contact or abutment with the user ’s body may be any acute angle.
  • the range of the included angle ⁇ is preferably 5 ° ⁇ 80 °; more preferably 15 ° to 70 °; still more preferably 25 ° to 60 °; still more preferably 25 ° to 50 °; still more preferably 28 ° to 50 °; still more preferably 30 ° to 39 °; even more preferably It is 31 ° to 38 °; more preferably 32 ° to 37 °; more preferably 33 ° to 36 °; more preferably 33 ° to 35.8 °; and more preferably 33.5 ° to 35 °.
  • the included angle ⁇ can be 26 °, 27 °, 28 °, 29 °, 30 °, 31 °, 32 °, 33 °, 34 °, 34.2 °, 35 °, 35.8 °, 36 °, 37 ° or 38 °, the error is controlled within 0.2 degrees.
  • the driving force may also have a component in the second and fourth quadrants of the XOY plane coordinate system. , Even the driving force can be located on the Y axis and so on.
  • FIG. 18 is a schematic structural diagram of a bone conduction speaker component acting on human skin and bone according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • the straight line on which the driving force is located is collinear or parallel to the straight line on which the driving device vibrates.
  • the direction of the driving force may be the same as or opposite to the vibration direction of the coil and / or the magnetic circuit component.
  • the panel can be flat or curved, or the panel has several protrusions or grooves.
  • the normal of the area on the panel that is in contact with or against the user's body is not parallel to the straight line where the driving force is located.
  • the area on the panel that is in contact with or abuts the user's body is relatively flat, which can be a flat surface or a quasi-plane with little curvature change.
  • the normal at any point on it can be used as the normal of the area.
  • the normal A of the panel 103 and the panel 103 and The normal A 'of the human skin contact surface may be parallel or coincident.
  • the normal of the area may be its average normal. For a detailed definition of the average normal, refer to the related description in FIG. 16, which is not repeated here.
  • the normal of the area when the panel is used for contacting the user's body with a panel that is non-planar, the normal of the area may also be determined as follows: a certain point in an area when the panel is in contact with human skin is selected, A tangent plane of the panel at the point is determined, a straight line passing through the point and perpendicular to the tangent plane is determined, and the straight line is used as the normal line of the panel.
  • the panel is used to make contact with human skin, the panel is non-planar, the selected point is different, the tangent plane of the panel at that point is different, and the normals determined will also be different. At this time, the normal A 'and The normal A of the panel is not parallel.
  • the straight line where the driving force is located (or the straight line where the driving device is vibrating) has an included angle ⁇ with the normal of the region, and the included angle is 0 ⁇ ⁇ 180 °.
  • the designated driving force line has a positive direction pointing out of the bone conduction speaker component via the panel (or the surface of the panel and / or the shell contacting the human skin)
  • the designated panel or the panel and / or the shell is in contact with the human body
  • the skin contact surface) normal has a positive direction pointing out of the bone conduction speaker module, and the angle formed by the two straight lines in the positive direction is an acute angle.
  • the bone conduction speaker assembly includes a driving device (also referred to as a transducing device in other embodiments), a transmission component 1803, a panel 1801, and a housing 1802.
  • the coil 1804 and the magnetic circuit component 1807 are both ring structures.
  • the driving device is a moving coil driving method, and includes a coil 1804 and a magnetic circuit component 1807.
  • the coil 1804 and the magnetic circuit assembly 1807 have mutually parallel axes, and the axis of the coil 1804 or the magnetic circuit assembly 1807 is perpendicular to the radial plane of the coil 1804 and / or the radial plane of the magnetic circuit assembly 1807. In some embodiments, the coil 1804 and the magnetic circuit assembly 1807 have the same central axis. The central axis of the coil 1804 is perpendicular to the radial plane of the coil 1804 and passes through the geometric center of the coil 1804. The central axis of the magnetic circuit assembly 1807 and the magnetic circuit The radial plane of the component 1807 is perpendicular and passes through the geometric center of the magnetic circuit component 1807. The axis ⁇ of the coil 1804 or the magnetic circuit assembly 1807 and the normal line of the panel 1801 have the aforementioned angle ⁇ .
  • the relationship between the driving force F and the skin deformation S will be described below with reference to FIG. 18.
  • the driving force generated by the driving device is parallel to the panel 1801 normal (that is, the included angle ⁇ is zero)
  • the relationship between the driving force and the total skin deformation is:
  • F ⁇ is the driving force
  • S ⁇ is the total deformation of the skin in the vertical skin direction
  • E is the elastic modulus of the skin
  • A is the contact area of the panel and the skin
  • h is the total thickness of the skin (that is, the panel and the bone the distance between).
  • F // is the driving force
  • S // is the total deformation of the skin in the direction parallel to the skin
  • G is the shear modulus of the skin
  • A is the contact area between the panel and the skin
  • h is the total thickness of the skin (that is, Panel to bone).
  • ⁇ is the Poisson's ratio of skin 0 ⁇ ⁇ 0.5, and thus the shear modulus G is less than the modulus of elasticity E, corresponding to the total deformation of the skin S //> under the same driving force S ⁇ .
  • the Poisson's ratio of the skin is close to 0.4.
  • FIG. 19 is an angle-relative displacement relationship diagram of a bone conduction speaker assembly provided according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • the relationship between the included angle ⁇ and the total skin deformation is that the larger the included angle ⁇ and the larger the relative displacement, the larger the total skin deformation S.
  • the volume of the bone conduction speaker component at low frequencies is positively related to the total skin deformation S.
  • the greater the S the greater the volume of bone conduction low frequencies.
  • the greater S ⁇ the greater the volume of the low frequency of bone conduction.
  • the relationship between the included angle ⁇ and the total skin deformation S is that the larger the included angle ⁇ , the larger the total skin deformation S, and the louder the low-frequency portion of the bone conduction speaker component is.
  • the relationship between the included angle ⁇ and the skin deformation S ⁇ in the vertical skin direction is that the larger the included angle ⁇ , the smaller the skin deformation S ⁇ in the vertical skin direction, corresponding to the high-frequency part of the bone conduction speaker component. The lower the volume.
  • the included angle ⁇ should be at a proper size.
  • the range of ⁇ is 5 ° to 80 °, or 15 ° to 70 °, or 25 ° to 50 °, or 25 ° to 35 °, or 25 ° to 30 °, and so on.
  • FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram of a low-frequency part of a frequency response curve of a bone conduction speaker component at different angles ⁇ provided according to the present application.
  • the panel is in contact with the skin and transmits vibration to the skin.
  • the skin also affects the vibration of the bone conduction speaker component, which affects the frequency response curve of the bone conduction speaker component. From the above analysis, we found that the larger the angle, the greater the total deformation of the skin under the same driving force, and the corresponding bone conduction speaker component, which is equivalent to the skin's reduced elasticity relative to its panel portion.
  • the frequency response can be changed.
  • the resonance peaks in the low frequency region of the curve are adjusted to the lower frequency region, which makes the low frequency dive deeper and the low frequency increased.
  • setting the included angle can effectively suppress the increase in vibration while increasing the low-frequency energy, thereby reducing the vibration.
  • the low-frequency sensitivity of the bone conduction speaker component is significantly improved, and the sound quality and the human experience are improved.
  • the increase in low frequency and less vibration can be expressed as the increase in the angle ⁇ in the range of (0, 90 °), the energy in the low frequency range in the vibration or sound signal increases, and Vibration is also increased, but the increase in energy in the low frequency range is greater than the increase in vibration. Therefore, the relative effect is relatively reduced. It can be seen from FIG. 20 that when the included angle is large, the resonance peak in the low frequency region appears at a lower frequency band, and the flat portion of the frequency curvature can be prolonged in disguise, thereby improving the sound quality of the speaker component.
  • the minimum angle ⁇ between the straight line where the driving force is located and the normal on the panel used to contact or abut the user ’s body can be any acute angle, and the acute angle here is not limited to the above 5 ° to 80 °
  • the included angle ⁇ can be less than 5 °, such as 1 °, 2 °, 3 °, 4 °, and so on.
  • the included angle ⁇ can be greater than 80 ° and less than 90 °, such as 81 °, 82 °, 85 °, and the like.
  • the specific value of the included angle ⁇ may not be an integer (for example, 81.3 °, 81.38 °). Such deformations are all within the protection scope of this application.
  • the speaker assembly 200 in FIG. 21 is equivalent to the speaker assembly 21 in FIGS. 1 and 16, and in conjunction with FIG. 16, the earphone housing 220 corresponds to the housing 104, and the earphone housing 220 transmits the vibration piece 214 and is connected.
  • the piece 216 corresponds to the transmission device 102
  • the magnetic circuit assembly 210 corresponds to the headphone core 101.
  • the speaker assembly 200 may include a magnetic circuit assembly 210, a coil 212, a vibration transmitting sheet 214, a connection member 216, and an earphone housing 220.
  • the magnetic circuit assembly 210 may include a first magnetic element 202, a first magnetically permeable element 204, and a second magnetically permeable element 206.
  • the earphone housing 220 may include a housing panel 222, a housing back 224, and a housing side 226.
  • the housing back surface 224 is located on a side opposite to the housing panel 222 and is respectively disposed on both end surfaces of the housing side surface 226.
  • the casing panel 222, the casing back surface 224, and the casing side surface 226 form an integrated structure with a certain accommodation space.
  • the magnetic circuit assembly 210, the coil 212, and the vibration transmitting sheet 214 are fixed inside the earphone housing 220.
  • the speaker assembly 200 may further include a housing support 228, the vibration transmitting sheet 214 may be connected to the earphone housing 220 through the housing support 228, the coil 212 may be fixed on the housing support 228, and the housing is driven by the housing support 228 220 vibration.
  • the housing bracket 228 may be a part of the earphone housing 220 or a separate component, which is directly or indirectly connected to the interior of the earphone housing 220.
  • the housing bracket 228 may be fixed on the inner surface of the housing side 226.
  • the housing bracket 228 may be adhered to the earphone housing 220 by glue, and may also be fixed to the earphone housing 220 by stamping, injection molding, snap-fitting, riveting, screwing or welding.
  • connection manner of the casing panel 222, the casing back surface 224, and the casing side surface 226 can be used to ensure that the earphone casing 220 has greater rigidity.
  • the housing panel 222, the housing back 224, and the housing side 226 may be integrally formed.
  • the housing back surface 224 and the housing side surface 226 may be a one-piece structure.
  • the outer shell panel 222 and the outer shell side 226 can be directly fixed by glue, or fixed by means of snapping, welding or screwing.
  • the glue may be a glue with strong viscosity and high hardness.
  • the casing panel 222 and the casing side surface 226 may be an integrally formed structure.
  • the casing back surface 224 and the casing side surface 226 may be directly fixed and fixed by glue, or may be fixed by snapping, welding, or screwing.
  • the housing panel 222, the housing back surface 224, and the housing side surface 226 are independent components, and the three can be performed by one or any combination of glue, snap, welding, or screw connection.
  • Fixed connection For example, the shell panel 222 and the shell side 226 are connected by glue, and the shell back surface 224 and the shell side 226 are connected by snapping, welding, or screwing. Or the shell back surface 224 and the shell side surface 226 are connected by glue, and the shell panel 222 and the shell side surface 226 are connected by snapping, welding or screwing.
  • the shells described in this application can be made by different assembly methods.
  • the housing may be a one-piece molding method, a split combination method, or a combination of the two.
  • the different splits can be fixed with glue or fixed by snapping, welding or screwing.
  • FIGS. 22-24 describe examples of several assembly manners of the casing.
  • the speaker assembly mainly includes a magnetic circuit assembly 2210 and a housing.
  • the magnetic circuit assembly 2210 may include a first magnetic element 2202, a first magnetically permeable element 2204, and a second magnetically permeable element 2206.
  • the housing may include a housing panel 2222, a housing back 2224, and a housing side 2226.
  • the housing side surface 2226 and the housing back surface 2224 are made in an integrated manner, and the housing panel 2222 is connected to one end of the housing side surface 2226 by a combination of parts.
  • the method of combining the pieces includes using glue to fix or fix the shell panel 2222 to one end of the side 2226 of the shell by means of snapping, welding or screwing.
  • the case panel 2222 and the case side 2226 may be made of different, the same, or partially the same materials.
  • the shell panel 2222 and the shell side 2226 are made of the same material, and the Young's modulus of the same material is greater than 2000 MPa. More preferably, the Young's modulus of the same material is greater than 4000 MPa. More preferably, the Young's modulus of the same material is greater than 6000 MPa. More preferably, the Young's modulus of the material of the earphone housing 220 is greater than 8000 MPa.
  • the Young's modulus of the same material is greater than 12000 MPa, more preferably, the Young's modulus of the same material is greater than 15000 MPa, and even more preferably, the Young's modulus of the same material is greater than 18000 MPa.
  • the shell panel 2222 and the shell side 2226 are made of different materials, and the Young's modulus of the different materials is greater than 4000 MPa. More preferably, the Young's modulus of the different materials is greater than 6000 MPa, more preferably, the Young's modulus of the different materials is greater than 8000 MPa, and even more preferably, the Young's modulus of the different materials is greater than 12000 MPa.
  • the Young's modulus of the different materials is greater than 15000 MPa, and even more preferably, the Young's modulus of the different materials is greater than 18000 MPa.
  • the material of the shell panel 2222 and / or the shell side 2226 includes, but is not limited to, acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene copolymer (AcrYlonitrile butadiene stYrene, ABS), polystyrene (PolYstYrene, PS), high Impact polystyrene (High impact polYstYrene, HIPS), polypropylene (PolYpropYlene, PP), polyethylene terephthalate (PolYethYlene terephthalate, PET), polyester (PolYester, PES), polycarbonate (PolYcarbonate, PC ), Polyamide (PolYamides, PA), polyvinyl chloride (PolYvinYlchloride, PVC), polyurethane (PolYurethanes
  • the material of the shell panel 2222 is any combination of glass fiber, carbon fiber, and materials such as polycarbonate (PolYcarbonate, PC) and polyamide (PolYamides, PA).
  • the material of the shell panel 2222 and / or the shell side 2226 may be made of carbon fiber and polycarbonate (PolYcarbonate, PC) according to a certain ratio.
  • the material of the shell panel 2222 and / or the shell side 2226 may be made of carbon fiber, glass fiber and polycarbonate (PolYcarbonate, PC) according to a certain ratio.
  • the material of the shell panel 2222 and / or the shell side 2226 may be made of glass fiber and polycarbonate (PolYcarbonate, PC) according to a certain ratio, and glass fiber and polyamide (PolYamides, PA) may also be used. Made by mixing in a certain proportion.
  • the casing panel 2222, the casing back surface 2224, and the casing side surface 2226 form an integrated structure with a certain accommodation space.
  • the vibration transmitting sheet 2214 is connected to the magnetic circuit assembly 2210 through a connecting member 2216.
  • the two sides of the magnetic circuit assembly 2210 are connected to the first magnetically permeable element 2204 and the second magnetically permeable element 2206, respectively.
  • the vibration transmitting sheet 2214 is fixed to the inside of the integrated structure through a housing support 2228.
  • the housing side 2226 has a step structure for supporting the housing support 2228.
  • the shell panel 2222 may be fixed to the shell bracket 2228 and the shell side 2226 at the same time, or may be separately fixed to the shell bracket 2228 or the shell side 2226.
  • the housing side 2226 and the housing bracket 2228 may be integrally formed.
  • the housing bracket 2228 may be directly fixed on the housing panel 2222 (for example, by means of glue sticking, snapping, welding or screwing).
  • the fixed shell panel 2222 and the shell bracket 2228 are then fixed to the side of the shell (for example, by means of glue sticking, snapping, welding or screwing).
  • the case bracket 2228 and the case panel 2222 may be integrally formed.
  • the speaker assembly mainly includes a magnetic circuit assembly 2240 and a housing.
  • the magnetic circuit assembly 2240 may include a first magnetic element 2232, a first magnetically conductive element 2234, and a second magnetically conductive element 2236.
  • the vibration transmitting plate 2244 is connected to the magnetic circuit assembly 2240 through a connecting member 2246.
  • This embodiment is different from the embodiment provided in FIG. 22 in that the housing bracket 2258 and the housing side 2256 are integrally formed.
  • the housing panel 2252 is fixed on the side of the housing side 2256 that is connected to the housing bracket 2258 (for example, by means of glue sticking, snapping, welding or screwing), and the housing back 2254 is fixed on the other side of the housing side 2256 (for example, (Through glue sticking, snapping, welding or screwing).
  • the shell bracket 2258 and the shell side 2256 are separate structures, and the shell panel 2252, the shell back 2254, and the shell bracket 2258 and the shell side 2256 are all pasted and snapped together by glue. , Welding or threaded connection for fixed connection.
  • the speaker assembly in this embodiment mainly includes a magnetic circuit assembly 2270 and a housing.
  • the magnetic circuit assembly 2270 may include a first magnetic element 2262, a first magnetically conductive element 2264, and a second magnetically conductive element 2266.
  • the vibration transmitting plate 2274 is connected to the magnetic circuit assembly 2270 through a connecting member 2276.
  • This embodiment is different from the embodiment provided in FIG. 23 in that the housing panel 2282 and the housing side 2286 are integrally formed.
  • the case back 2284 is fixed to the side of the case side 2286 opposite to the case panel 2282 (for example, by means of gluing, snapping, welding, or screwing).
  • the shell bracket 2288 is fixed on the shell panel 2282 and / or the shell side 2286 by means of glue sticking, snap-fitting, welding or screwing.
  • the housing bracket 2288, the housing panel 2282, and the housing side 2286 are integrally formed structures.
  • the case 700 may include a case panel 710, a case back 720, and a case side 730.
  • the shell panel 710 is in contact with the human body, and transmits the vibration of the speaker assembly to the human auditory nerve.
  • the amplitude and phase of the vibration of the housing panel 710 and the housing back 720 remain the same or substantially the same (the side 730 of the housing does not compress air and therefore does not Generating sound leakage), so that the first sound leakage signal generated by the housing panel 710 and the second sound leakage signal generated by the back surface 720 of the housing can be superimposed on each other.
  • the superimposition can reduce the amplitude of the first leaky sound wave or the second leaky sound wave, thereby achieving the purpose of reducing the sound leakage of the housing 700.
  • the certain frequency range includes at least a portion with a frequency greater than 500 Hz.
  • the certain frequency range includes at least a part with a frequency greater than 600 Hz.
  • the certain frequency range includes at least a part with a frequency greater than 800 Hz.
  • the certain frequency range includes at least a part with a frequency greater than 1000 Hz.
  • the certain frequency range includes at least a part with a frequency greater than 2000 Hz. More preferably, the certain frequency range includes at least a portion whose frequency is greater than 5000 Hz. More preferably, the certain frequency range includes at least a portion having a frequency greater than 8000 Hz. Further preferably, the certain frequency range includes at least a portion having a frequency greater than 10000 Hz.
  • the rigidity of the housing of the speaker assembly affects the amplitude and phase of vibration in different parts of the housing (eg, the shell panel, the back of the shell, and / or the side of the shell), thereby affecting the sound leakage of the speaker assembly.
  • the shell panel and the back of the shell can maintain the same or substantially the same vibration amplitude and phase at a higher frequency, thereby significantly reducing the speaker assembly. Sound leakage.
  • the higher frequency may include a frequency of not less than 1000 Hz, for example, a frequency between 1000 Hz-2000 Hz, a frequency between 1100 Hz-2000 Hz, a frequency between 1300 Hz-2000 Hz, and a frequency between 1500 Hz-2000 Hz.
  • the higher frequency mentioned herein may include a frequency of not less than 2000 Hz, for example, a frequency between 2000 Hz and 3000 Hz, a frequency between 2100 Hz and 3000 Hz, a frequency between 2300 Hz and 3000 Hz, and a frequency between 2500 Hz and 3000 Hz.
  • Frequency between 2700Hz-3000Hz, or between 2900Hz-3000Hz.
  • the higher frequency may include a frequency of not less than 4000 Hz, for example, a frequency between 4000 Hz and 5000 Hz, a frequency between 4100 Hz and 5000 Hz, a frequency between 4300 Hz and 5000 Hz, a frequency between 4500 Hz and 5000 Hz, and 4700 Hz.
  • Frequency between -5000Hz, or between 4900Hz-5000Hz.
  • the higher frequency may include a frequency not less than 6000 Hz, for example, a frequency between 6000 Hz-8000 Hz, a frequency between 6100 Hz-8000 Hz, a frequency between 6300 Hz-8000 Hz, and a frequency between 6500 Hz-8000 Hz, Frequency between 7000Hz-8000Hz, frequency between 7500Hz-8000Hz, or frequency between 7900Hz-8000Hz.
  • the higher frequency may include a frequency not less than 8000 Hz, for example, a frequency between 8000 Hz-12000 Hz, a frequency between 8100 Hz-12000 Hz, a frequency between 8300 Hz-12000 Hz, and a frequency between 8500 Hz-12000 Hz, Frequency between 9000Hz-12000Hz, frequency between 10000Hz-12000Hz, or frequency between 11000Hz-12000Hz.
  • the vibration amplitude of the shell panel and the back of the shell are the same or substantially the same means that the ratio of the vibration amplitude of the shell panel and the back of the shell is within a certain range.
  • the ratio of the amplitude of the vibration between the shell panel and the back of the case is between 0.3 and 3.
  • the ratio of the amplitude of the vibration between the shell panel and the back of the case is between 0.4 and 2.5, preferably, the amplitude of the vibration between the shell panel and the back of the shell.
  • the ratio of the vibration amplitude is between 0.5 and 1.5, more preferably, the ratio of the vibration amplitude of the case panel and the back of the case is between 0.6 and 1.4, and more preferably, the ratio of the vibration amplitude of the case panel and the back of the case is between 0.7 and 1.2.
  • the ratio of the amplitude of the vibration between the case panel and the back of the case is between 0.75 and 1.15, more preferably, the ratio of the amplitude of the vibration between the case panel and the back of the case is between 0.8 and 1.1, more preferably, the case panel and The ratio of the amplitude of the vibration on the back of the case is between 0.85 and 1.1, and further preferably, the ratio of the amplitude of the vibration on the case panel and the back of the case is between 0.9 and 1.05.
  • the vibrations of the housing panel and the back of the housing may be expressed by other physical quantities capable of characterizing the amplitude of the vibrations. For example, the sound pressure generated by the shell panel and the back of the shell at one point in the space can be used to characterize the vibration amplitude of the shell panel and the back of the shell.
  • Maintaining the same or substantially the same vibration phase between the shell panel and the back of the shell means that the difference between the vibration phases of the shell panel and the back of the shell is within a certain range.
  • the difference between the vibration phase of the case panel and the back of the case is between -90 ° and 90 °, preferably, the difference of the vibration phase of the case panel and the back of the case is between -80 ° and 80 °, preferably,
  • the difference between the vibration phase of the housing panel and the back of the housing is between -60 ° and 60 °, preferably, the difference between the vibration phase of the housing panel and the back of the housing is between -45 ° and 45 °, and more preferably, the housing
  • the difference between the vibration phase of the panel and the back of the case is between -30 ° and 30 °, more preferably, the difference of the vibration phase of the case panel and the back of the case is between -20 ° and 20 °, and more preferably, the case The difference between the vibration phase of the panel and the back
  • the difference between the vibration phase of the panel and the back of the case is between -12 ° and 12 °. More preferably, the case The difference between the vibration phase of the panel and the back of the case is between -10 ° and 10 °, more preferably, the difference of the vibration phase between the case panel and the back of the case is between -8 ° and 8 °, and more preferably, the case The difference between the vibration phase of the panel and the back of the housing is between -6 ° and 6 °, more preferably, the housing panel The difference between the vibration phase on the back of the case is between -5 ° and 5 °. More preferably, the difference between the vibration phase on the case panel and the back of the case is between -4 ° and 4 °.
  • the difference between the case panel and the The difference between the vibration phase on the back of the housing is between -3 ° and 3 °, and more preferably, the difference between the vibration phase on the back of the housing panel and the back of the housing is between -2 ° and 2 °.
  • the difference between the vibration phases on the back of the case is between -1 ° and 1 °. Further preferably, the difference between the vibration phases on the back of the case panel and the back of the case is 0 °.
  • FIG. 26 is a schematic longitudinal sectional view of a speaker assembly according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • the headphone core 100 may include a first magnetic element 102, a first magnetically permeable element 104, a second magnetically permeable element 106, a first vibration plate 108, a voice coil 110, a second vibration plate 112, and a vibration panel 114.
  • some components of the earphone core in the speaker assembly may constitute a magnetic circuit assembly.
  • the magnetic circuit assembly may include a first magnetic element 102, a first magnetically permeable element 104, and a second magnetically permeable element 106.
  • the magnetic circuit component can generate a first full magnetic field (also referred to as "total magnetic field of the magnetic circuit component" or "first magnetic field").
  • the magnetic element described in this application refers to an element that can generate a magnetic field, such as a magnet.
  • the magnetic element may have a magnetization direction, and the magnetization direction refers to a direction of a magnetic field inside the magnetic element.
  • the first magnetic element 102 may include one or more magnets, and the first magnetic element may generate a second magnetic field.
  • the magnet may include a metal alloy magnet, ferrite, or the like.
  • the metal alloy magnet may include neodymium iron boron, samarium cobalt, aluminum nickel cobalt, iron chromium cobalt, aluminum iron boron, iron carbon aluminum, or the like, or a combination thereof.
  • the ferrite may include barium ferrite, ferrite, ferromanganese ferrite, lithium manganese ferrite, or the like, or a combination thereof.
  • a lower surface of the first magnetically conductive element 104 may be connected to an upper surface of the first magnetic element 102.
  • the second magnetically conductive element 106 can be connected to the first magnetic element 102.
  • the permeable magnet mentioned here can also be called a magnetic field concentrator or an iron core.
  • the magnetizer can adjust the distribution of a magnetic field (for example, a second magnetic field generated by the first magnetic element 102).
  • the magnetizer may include an element processed from a soft magnetic material.
  • the soft magnetic material may include a metal material, a metal alloy, a metal oxide material, an amorphous metal material, and the like, such as iron, an iron-silicon alloy, an iron-aluminum alloy, a nickel-iron alloy, and iron-cobalt Series alloy, low carbon steel, silicon steel sheet, silicon steel sheet, ferrite, etc.
  • the magnetizer may be processed by one or more combinations of casting, plastic working, cutting processing, powder metallurgy, and the like.
  • Casting can include sand casting, investment casting, pressure casting, centrifugal casting, etc .; plastic processing can include one or more combinations of rolling, casting, forging, stamping, extrusion, drawing, etc .; cutting processing can include turning, milling , Planing, grinding, etc.
  • the processing method of the magnetizing means may include 3D printing, a numerically controlled machine tool, and the like.
  • the connection manner between the first magnetically permeable element 104, the second magnetically permeable element 106, and the first magnetic element 102 may include one or more combinations such as bonding, snapping, welding, riveting, and bolting.
  • the first magnetic element 102, the first magnetically permeable element 104, and the second magnetically permeable element 106 may be configured as an axisymmetric structure.
  • the axisymmetric structure may be a ring structure, a columnar structure, or other axisymmetric structures.
  • a magnetic gap may be formed between the first magnetic element 102 and the second magnetically permeable element 106.
  • the voice coil 110 may be disposed in the magnetic gap.
  • the voice coil 110 may be connected to the first vibration plate 108.
  • the first vibration plate 108 may be connected to the second vibration plate 112, and the second vibration plate 112 may be connected to the vibration panel 114.
  • the voice coil 110 When a current is passed into the voice coil 110, the voice coil 110 is located in a magnetic field formed by the first magnetic element 102, the first magnetically permeable element 104, and the second magnetically permeable element 106, and will be subjected to ampere force.
  • the ampere force drives the voice coil 110 to vibrate, and the vibration of the voice coil 110 will drive the vibration of the first vibration plate 108, the second vibration plate 112, and the vibration panel 114.
  • the vibration panel 114 transmits the vibration to the auditory nerve through tissues and bones, so that a person hears sound.
  • the vibration panel 114 may be in direct contact with human skin, or may be in contact with the skin through a vibration transmission layer composed of a specific material.
  • the magnetic induction lines passing through the voice coil are not uniform and divergent.
  • magnetic leakage may be formed in the magnetic circuit, that is, more magnetic lines of induction leak out of the magnetic gap and fail to pass through the voice coil, thereby reducing the magnetic induction strength (or magnetic field strength) at the position of the voice coil and affecting the speaker components The sensitivity. Therefore, the earphone core 100 may further include at least one second magnetic element and / or at least one third magnetically permeable element (not shown in the figure).
  • the at least one second magnetic element and / or the at least one third magnetically permeable element can suppress the leakage of magnetic induction lines and restrict the shape of the magnetic induction lines passing through the voice coil, so that more magnetic induction lines pass through the sound as horizontally and densely as possible.
  • FIG. 27 is a schematic longitudinal sectional view of a magnetic circuit assembly 2100 according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • the magnetic circuit assembly 2100 may include a first magnetic element 2102, a first magnetically permeable element 2104, a second magnetically permeable element 2106, and a second magnetic element 2108.
  • the first magnetic element 2102 and / or the second magnetic element 2108 may include any one or several magnets described in this application.
  • the first magnetic element 2102 may include a first magnet
  • the second magnetic element 2108 may include a second magnet
  • the first magnet and the second magnet may be the same or different.
  • the first magnetically permeable element 2104 and / or the second magnetically permeable element 2106 may include any one or several magnetically permeable materials described in this application.
  • the processing method of the first magnetically permeable element 2104 and / or the second magnetically permeable element 2106 may include any one or several processing methods described in this application.
  • the first magnetic element 2102 and / or the first magnetically permeable element 2104 may be provided as an axisymmetric structure.
  • the first magnetic element 2102 and / or the first magnetically permeable element 2104 may be a cylinder, a rectangular parallelepiped, or a hollow ring (for example, the cross-section is the shape of a racetrack).
  • the first magnetic element 2102 and the first magnetically permeable element 2104 may be coaxial cylinders containing the same or different diameters.
  • the second magnetically permeable element 2106 may be a groove-type structure.
  • the groove structure may include a U-shaped cross section (as shown in FIG. 26).
  • the groove-shaped second magnetically permeable element 2106 may include a bottom plate and a side wall.
  • the bottom plate and the side wall may be integrally formed.
  • the side wall may be formed by extending the bottom plate in a direction perpendicular to the bottom plate.
  • the bottom plate may be connected to the side wall by any one or several connection methods described in this application.
  • the second magnetic element 2108 may be set in a ring shape or a sheet shape.
  • the second magnetic element 2108 may be annular.
  • the second magnetic element 2108 may include an inner ring and an outer ring.
  • the shape of the inner ring and / or the outer ring may be a circle, an ellipse, a triangle, a quadrangle or any other polygon.
  • the second magnetic element 2108 may be composed of multiple magnets arranged. Both ends of any one of the plurality of magnets may be connected to two ends of adjacent magnets or there may be a certain distance. The spacing between the plurality of magnets may be the same or different.
  • the second magnetic element 2108 may be formed by equidistantly arranging two or three sheet-shaped magnets.
  • the shape of the sheet-shaped magnet may be a fan shape, a quadrangular shape, or the like.
  • the second magnetic element 2108 may be coaxial with the first magnetic element 2102 and / or the first magnetically permeable element 2104.
  • the upper surface of the first magnetic element 2102 may be connected to the lower surface of the first magnetically conductive element 2104.
  • the lower surface of the first magnetic element 2102 can be connected to the bottom plate of the second magnetically conductive element 206.
  • a lower surface of the second magnetic element 2108 is connected to a side wall of the second magnetic conductive element 2106.
  • the connection manner between the first magnetic element 2102, the first magnetically permeable element 2104, the second magnetically permeable element 2106, and / or the second magnetic element 2108 may include one of bonding, snapping, welding, riveting, bolting, and the like, or Multiple combinations.
  • a magnetic gap is formed between the first magnetic element 2102 and / or the first magnetically permeable element 2104 and the inner ring of the second magnetic element 2108.
  • a voice coil 2128 may be disposed in the magnetic gap.
  • the height of the second magnetic element 2108 and the voice coil 2128 relative to the bottom plate of the second magnetically conductive element 2106 are equal.
  • the first magnetic element 2102, the first magnetically permeable element 2104, the second magnetically permeable element 2106, and the second magnetic element 2108 may form a magnetic circuit.
  • the magnetic circuit component 2100 may generate a first full magnetic field (also may be referred to as "total magnetic field of the magnetic circuit component” or "first magnetic field”), and the first magnetic element 2102 may generate a second magnetic field.
  • the first full magnetic field is a magnetic field generated by all components in the magnetic circuit assembly 2100 (for example, the first magnetic element 2102, the first magnetically permeable element 2104, the second magnetically permeable element 2106, and the second magnetic element 2108). Together.
  • the magnetic field strength of the first full magnetic field in the magnetic gap (also referred to as magnetic induction intensity or magnetic flux density) is greater than the magnetic field strength of the second magnetic field in the magnetic gap.
  • the second magnetic element 2108 may generate a third magnetic field, and the third magnetic field may increase the magnetic field strength of the first full magnetic field at the magnetic gap.
  • the third magnetic field increasing the magnetic field strength of the first full magnetic field here means that the magnetic field strength of the first full magnetic field in the magnetic gap is greater than that when there is a third magnetic field (ie, the second magnetic element 2108 is present).
  • the first full magnetic field when the third magnetic field is present ie, the second magnetic element 2108 is not present.
  • the magnetic circuit component indicates a structure including all magnetic elements and magnetically permeable elements
  • the first total magnetic field indicates a magnetic field generated by the entire magnetic circuit component
  • the second magnetic field and the third magnetic field ...
  • the N-th magnetic field represents the magnetic field generated by the corresponding magnetic element.
  • the magnetic elements that generate the second magnetic field may be the same or different.
  • the included angle between the magnetization direction of the first magnetic element 2102 and the magnetization direction of the second magnetic element 2108 is between 0 degrees and 180 degrees. In some embodiments, the included angle between the magnetization direction of the first magnetic element 2102 and the magnetization direction of the second magnetic element 2108 is between 45 degrees and 135 degrees. In some embodiments, the included angle between the magnetization direction of the first magnetic element 2102 and the magnetization direction of the second magnetic element 2108 is equal to or greater than 90 degrees.
  • the magnetization direction of the first magnetic element 2102 is perpendicular to the lower surface or the upper surface of the first magnetic element 202, and the magnetization direction of the second magnetic element 2108 is determined by the first The inner ring of the two magnetic elements 2108 points toward the outer ring (as shown by the direction b in the figure, on the right side of the first magnetic element 2102, the magnetization direction of the first magnetic element 2102 is deflected 90 degrees in a clockwise direction).
  • the included angle between the direction of the first full magnetic field and the magnetization direction of the second magnetic element 2108 is not higher than 90 degrees. In some embodiments, at the position of the second magnetic element 2108, the angle between the direction of the magnetic field generated by the first magnetic element 2102 and the direction of the magnetization of the second magnetic element 2108 may be 0 degrees, 10 degrees, and 20 degrees Angles that are less than or equal to 90 degrees.
  • the second magnetic component 2108 can increase the total magnetic flux in the magnetic gap in the magnetic circuit component 2100, thereby increasing the magnetic induction intensity in the magnetic gap.
  • the originally scattered magnetic induction lines will converge to the position of the magnetic gap, further increasing the magnetic induction intensity in the magnetic gap.
  • FIG. 28 is a schematic longitudinal sectional view of a magnetic circuit assembly 2600 according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • the magnetic circuit component 2600 differs from the magnetic circuit component 2100 in that it may further include at least one conductive element (for example, a first conductive element 2118, a second conductive element 2120, and a third conductive element 2122). .
  • the conductive element may include a metal material, a metal alloy material, an inorganic non-metal material, or other conductive materials.
  • Metal materials may include gold, silver, copper, aluminum, etc .; metal alloy materials may include iron-based alloys, aluminum-based alloy materials, copper-based alloys, zinc-based alloys, etc .; inorganic non-metal materials may include graphite and the like.
  • the conductive element may be in a sheet shape, a ring shape, a mesh shape, or the like.
  • the first conductive element 2118 may be disposed on an upper surface of the first magnetically conductive element 2104.
  • the second conductive element 2120 can be connected to the first magnetic element 2102 and the second magnetic conductive element 2106.
  • the third conductive element 2122 may be connected to a sidewall of the first magnetic element 2102.
  • the first magnetically conductive element 2104 may protrude from the first magnetic element 2102 to form a first recessed portion, and the third conductive element 2122 is disposed in the first recessed portion.
  • the first conductive element 2118, the second conductive element 2120, and the third conductive element 2122 may include the same or different conductive materials.
  • the first conductive element 2118, the second conductive element 2120, and the third conductive element 2122 may be connected to the first magnetically conductive element 2104, the second magnetically conductive element 2106, and / or by any one or more of the connection methods described in this application.
  • a magnetic gap is formed between the first magnetic element 2102, the first magnetically permeable element 2104, and the inner ring of the second magnetic element 2108.
  • a voice coil 2128 may be provided in the magnetic gap.
  • the first magnetic element 2102, the first magnetically permeable element 2104, the second magnetically permeable element 2106, and the second magnetic element 2108 may form a magnetic circuit.
  • the conductive element can reduce the inductive reactance of the voice coil 2128. For example, if the voice coil 2128 passes a first alternating current, a first alternating induced magnetic field is generated near the voice coil 2128.
  • the first alternating induced magnetic field will cause inductive reactance of the voice coil 2128 and hinder the movement of the voice coil 2128.
  • a conductive element for example, a first conductive element 2118, a second conductive element 2120, and a third conductive element 2122
  • the conductive element can be induced by the first alternating induced magnetic field.
  • Second alternating current A third alternating current in the conductive element can generate a second alternating induced magnetic field near the third alternating current.
  • the second alternating induced magnetic field is opposite to the first alternating induced magnetic field in the direction, which can weaken the first alternating current. Changing the induced magnetic field, thereby reducing the inductive reactance of the voice coil 2128, increasing the current in the voice coil, and improving the sensitivity of the speaker component.
  • FIG. 29 is a schematic longitudinal sectional view of a magnetic circuit assembly 2700 according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • the magnetic circuit assembly 2700 differs from the magnetic circuit assembly 2500 in that the magnetic circuit assembly 2700 may further include a third magnetic element 2110, a fourth magnetic element 2112, a fifth magnetic element 2114, and a third guide.
  • the third magnetic element 2110, the fourth magnetic element 2112, the fifth magnetic element 2114, the third magnetically permeable element 2116, and / or the sixth magnetic element 2124, and the seventh magnetic element 2126 may be provided as coaxial circular cylinders.
  • the upper surface of the second magnetic element 2108 is connected to the seventh magnetic element 2126, and the lower surface of the second magnetic element 2108 may be connected to the third magnetic element 2110.
  • the third magnetic element 2110 can be connected to the second magnetically conductive element 2106.
  • the upper surface of the seventh magnetic element 2126 may be connected to the third magnetically conductive element 2116.
  • the fourth magnetic element 2112 can be connected to the second magnetically permeable element 2106 and the first magnetic element 2102.
  • the sixth magnetic element 2124 can be connected to the fifth magnetic element 2114, the third magnetically permeable element 2116, and the seventh magnetic element 2126.
  • the third magnetically conductive element 2116, the sixth magnetic element 2124, and the seventh magnetic element 2126 may form a magnetic circuit and a magnetic gap.
  • the included angle between the magnetization direction of the first magnetic element 2102 and the magnetization direction of the sixth magnetic element 2124 may be between 0 degrees and 180 degrees. In some embodiments, the included angle between the magnetization direction of the first magnetic element 2102 and the magnetization direction of the sixth magnetic element 2124 is between 45 degrees and 135 degrees. In some embodiments, the included angle between the magnetization direction of the first magnetic element 2102 and the magnetization direction of the sixth magnetic element 2124 is not higher than 90 degrees.
  • the magnetization direction of the first magnetic element 2102 is perpendicular to the lower surface or the upper surface of the first magnetic element 2102 vertically upward (as shown in the direction a), and the magnetization direction of the sixth magnetic element 2124 is changed from the sixth The outer ring of the magnetic element 2124 points toward the inner ring (as shown in the direction g in the figure, on the right side of the first magnetic element 2102, the magnetization direction of the first magnetic element 2102 is deflected 270 degrees in the clockwise direction).
  • the magnetization direction of the sixth magnetic element 2124 and the magnetization direction of the fourth magnetic element 2112 may be the same in the same vertical direction.
  • the included angle between the direction of the magnetic field generated by the magnetic circuit assembly 2700 and the magnetization direction of the sixth magnetic element 2124 is not higher than 90 degrees. In some embodiments, at the position of the sixth magnetic element 2124, the angle between the direction of the magnetic field generated by the first magnetic element 2102 and the magnetization direction of the sixth magnetic element 2124 may be 0 degrees, 10 degrees, and 20 degrees Angles that are less than or equal to 90 degrees.
  • the included angle between the magnetization direction of the first magnetic element 2102 and the magnetization direction of the seventh magnetic element 2126 may be between 0 degrees and 180 degrees. In some embodiments, the included angle between the magnetization direction of the first magnetic element 2102 and the magnetization direction of the seventh magnetic element 2126 is between 45 degrees and 135 degrees. In some embodiments, the included angle between the magnetization direction of the first magnetic element 2102 and the magnetization direction of the seventh magnetic element 2126 is not higher than 90 degrees.
  • the magnetization direction of the first magnetic element 2102 is perpendicular to the lower surface or the upper surface of the first magnetic element 2102 vertically upward (as shown in the direction a), and the magnetization direction of the seventh magnetic element 2126 is changed from the seventh The lower surface of the magnetic element 2126 points to the upper surface (as shown in the direction f in the figure, on the right side of the first magnetic element 2102, the magnetization direction of the first magnetic element 2102 is deflected 360 degrees in a clockwise direction). In some embodiments, the magnetization direction of the seventh magnetic element 2126 and the magnetization direction of the third magnetic element 2110 may be opposite.
  • the included angle between the direction of the magnetic field generated by the magnetic circuit assembly 2700 and the magnetization direction of the seventh magnetic element 2126 is not higher than 90 degrees. In some embodiments, at the position of the seventh magnetic element 2126, the angle between the direction of the magnetic field generated by the first magnetic element 2102 and the magnetization direction of the seventh magnetic element 2126 may be 0 degrees, 10 degrees, and 20 degrees Angles that are less than or equal to 90 degrees.
  • the third magnetically permeable element 2116 can close the magnetic circuit generated by the magnetic circuit component 2700, so that more magnetic induction lines are concentrated in the magnetic gap, thereby achieving a place where the magnetic leakage is suppressed and the magnetic gap is increased. Magnetic induction strength, and the effect of improving the sensitivity of speaker components.
  • FIG. 30 is a schematic longitudinal sectional view of a magnetic circuit assembly 2900 according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • the magnetic circuit assembly 2900 may include a first magnetic element 2902, a first magnetically permeable element 2904, a first full magnetic field changing element 2906, and a second magnetic element 2908.
  • the upper surface of the first magnetic element 2902 may be connected to the lower surface of the first magnetically conductive element 2904, and the second magnetic element 2908 may be connected to the first magnetic element 2902 and the first full magnetic field changing element 2906.
  • the connection manner between the first magnetic element 2902, the first magnetically permeable element 2904, the first full magnetic field changing element 2906, and / or the second magnetic element 2908 may be based on any one or several connection manners described in this application.
  • the first magnetic element 2902, the first magnetically permeable element 2904, the first full magnetic field changing element 2906, and / or the second magnetic element 2908 may form a magnetic circuit and a magnetic gap.
  • the magnetic circuit assembly 2900 may generate a first full magnetic field, and the first magnetic element 2902 may generate a second magnetic field.
  • the magnetic field strength of the first full magnetic field in the magnetic gap is greater than that of the second magnetic field.
  • the second magnetic element 2908 may generate a third magnetic field, which may increase the magnetic field strength of the second magnetic field at the magnetic gap.
  • the included angle between the magnetization direction of the first magnetic element 2902 and the magnetization direction of the second magnetic element 2908 may be between 0 degrees and 180 degrees. In some embodiments, the included angle between the magnetization direction of the first magnetic element 2902 and the magnetization direction of the second magnetic element 2908 is between 45 degrees and 135 degrees. In some embodiments, the included angle between the magnetization direction of the first magnetic element 2902 and the magnetization direction of the second magnetic element 2908 may not be higher than 90 degrees.
  • the included angle between the direction of the first full magnetic field and the magnetization direction of the second magnetic element 2908 is not higher than 90 degrees. In some embodiments, at the position of the second magnetic element 2908, the included angle between the direction of the magnetic field generated by the first magnetic element 2902 and the magnetization direction of the second magnetic element 2908 may be 0 degrees, 10 degrees, and 20 degrees Angles that are less than or equal to 90 degrees.
  • the magnetization direction of the first magnetic element 2902 is perpendicular to the lower surface or the upper surface of the first magnetic element 2902 vertically upward (as shown in the direction of a), and the magnetization direction of the second magnetic element 2908 is defined by the second magnetic element 2908.
  • the outer ring is pointed toward the inner ring (as shown by the direction c in the figure, on the right side of the first magnetic element 2902, the magnetization direction of the first magnetic element 2902 is deflected 270 degrees clockwise).
  • the first full magnetic field changing element 2906 in the magnetic circuit component 2900 can increase the total magnetic flux in the magnetic gap, thereby increasing the magnetic induction intensity in the magnetic gap.
  • the originally scattered magnetic flux lines will converge to the position of the magnetic gap, further increasing the magnetic induction intensity in the magnetic gap.
  • FIG. 31 is a schematic longitudinal sectional view of a magnetic circuit assembly 3000 according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • the magnetic circuit assembly 3000 may include a first magnetic element 2902, a first magnetically permeable element 2904, a first full magnetic field changing element 2906, a second magnetic element 2908, and a third magnetic element 2910.
  • the first full magnetic field changing element 2906 and / or the second ring element 2922 may include a ring magnetic element or a ring magnetically permeable element.
  • the ring-shaped magnetic element may include any one or several kinds of magnetic materials described in this application, and the ring-shaped magnetically permeable element may include any one or several types of magnetically conductive materials described in this application.
  • the sixth magnetic element 2918 may be connected to the fifth magnetic element 2916 and the second ring element 2922
  • the seventh magnetic element 2920 may be connected to the third magnetic element 2910 and the second ring element 2922.
  • the first magnetic element 2902, the fifth magnetic element 2916, the second magnetic element 2908, the third magnetic element 2910, the fourth magnetic element 2912, the sixth magnetic element 2918, and / or the seventh magnetic element 2920 and The first magnetically permeable element 2904, the first full magnetic field changing element 2906, and the second annular element 2922 may form a magnetic circuit.
  • an included angle between the magnetization direction of the first magnetic element 2902 and the magnetization direction of the sixth magnetic element 2918 may be between 0 degrees and 180 degrees. In some embodiments, the included angle between the magnetization direction of the first magnetic element 2902 and the magnetization direction of the sixth magnetic element 2918 is between 45 degrees and 135 degrees. In some embodiments, the included angle between the magnetization direction of the first magnetic element 2902 and the magnetization direction of the sixth magnetic element 2918 is not higher than 90 degrees.
  • the magnetization direction of the first magnetic element 2902 is perpendicular to the lower surface or the upper surface of the first magnetic element 2902 vertically upward (as shown in the direction a), and the magnetization direction of the sixth magnetic element 2918 is changed from the sixth The outer ring of the magnetic element 2918 points to the inner ring (as shown in the direction f in the figure, on the right side of the first magnetic element 2902, the magnetization direction of the first magnetic element 2902 is deflected 270 degrees clockwise). In some embodiments, in the same vertical direction, the magnetization direction of the sixth magnetic element 2918 and the magnetization direction of the second magnetic element 2908 may be the same.
  • the magnetization direction of the first magnetic element 2902 is perpendicular to the lower surface or the upper surface of the first magnetic element 2902 vertically upward (as shown in the direction a), and the magnetization direction of the seventh magnetic element 2920 is changed from the seventh The lower surface of the magnetic element 2920 points to the upper surface (as shown by the direction e in the figure, on the right side of the first magnetic element 2902, the magnetization direction of the first magnetic element 2902 is deflected 360 degrees in a clockwise direction).
  • the magnetization direction of the seventh magnetic element 2920 and the magnetization direction of the fourth magnetic element 2912 may be the same.
  • the included angle between the direction of the magnetic field generated by the magnetic circuit assembly 2900 and the magnetization direction of the sixth magnetic element 2918 is not higher than 90 degrees. In some embodiments, at the position of the sixth magnetic element 2918, the included angle between the direction of the magnetic field generated by the first magnetic element 2902 and the magnetization direction of the sixth magnetic element 2918 may be 0 degrees, 10 degrees, and 20 degrees Angles that are less than or equal to 90 degrees.
  • an included angle between the magnetization direction of the first magnetic element 2902 and the magnetization direction of the seventh magnetic element 2920 may be between 0 degrees and 180 degrees. In some embodiments, the included angle between the magnetization direction of the first magnetic element 2902 and the magnetization direction of the seventh magnetic element 2920 is between 45 degrees and 135 degrees. In some embodiments, the included angle between the magnetization direction of the first magnetic element 2902 and the magnetization direction of the seventh magnetic element 2920 is not higher than 90 degrees.
  • the included angle between the direction of the magnetic field generated by the magnetic circuit assembly 3000 and the magnetization direction of the seventh magnetic element 2920 is not higher than 90 degrees. In some embodiments, at the position of the seventh magnetic element 2920, the included angle between the direction of the magnetic field generated by the first magnetic element 2902 and the magnetization direction of the seventh magnetic element 2920 may be 0 degrees, 10 degrees, and 20 degrees Angles that are less than or equal to 90 degrees.
  • the first full magnetic field changing element 2906 may be a ring-shaped magnetic element.
  • the magnetization direction of the first full magnetic field changing element 2906 may be the same as that of the second magnetic element 2908 or the fourth magnetic element 2912.
  • the magnetization direction of the first full magnetic field changing element 2906 may be directed from the outer ring of the first full magnetic field changing element 2906 to the inner ring.
  • the second ring element 2922 may be a ring magnetic element.
  • the magnetization direction of the second ring element 2922 may be the same as that of the sixth magnetic element 2918 or the seventh magnetic element 2920.
  • the magnetization direction of the second ring element 2922 may be directed from the outer ring of the second ring element 2922 to the inner ring.
  • multiple magnetic elements can increase the total magnetic flux, and the interaction of different magnetic elements can suppress the leakage of magnetic induction lines, increase the magnetic induction strength at the magnetic gap, and increase the sensitivity of the speaker assembly.
  • FIG. 32 is a schematic longitudinal sectional view of a magnetic circuit assembly 3100 according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • the magnetic circuit assembly 3100 may include a first magnetic element 3102, a first magnetically permeable element 3104, a second magnetically permeable element 3106, and a second magnetic element 3108.
  • the first magnetic element 3102 and / or the second magnetic element 3108 may include any one or several magnets described in this application.
  • the first magnetic element 3102 may include a first magnet
  • the second magnetic element 3108 may include a second magnet
  • the first magnet and the second magnet may be the same or different.
  • the first magnetically permeable element 3104 and / or the second magnetically permeable element 3106 may include any one or several magnetically permeable materials described in this application.
  • the processing method of the first magnetically permeable element 3104 and / or the second magnetically permeable element 3106 may include any one or several processing methods described in this application.
  • the first magnetic element 3102, the first magnetically permeable element 3104, and / or the second magnetic element 3108 may be provided as an axisymmetric structure.
  • the first magnetic element 3102, the first magnetically permeable element 3104, and / or the second magnetic element 3108 may be a cylinder.
  • the first magnetic element 3102, the first magnetically permeable element 3104, and / or the second magnetic element 3108 may be coaxial cylinders containing the same or different diameters.
  • the thickness of the first magnetic element 3102 may be greater than or equal to the thickness of the second magnetic element 3108.
  • the second magnetically permeable element 3106 may be a groove-type structure.
  • the groove structure may include a U-shaped cross section.
  • the groove-shaped second magnetically conductive element 3106 may include a bottom plate and a side wall.
  • the bottom plate and the side wall may be integrally formed.
  • the side wall may be formed by extending the bottom plate in a direction perpendicular to the bottom plate.
  • the bottom plate may be connected to the side wall by any one or several connection methods described in this application.
  • the second magnetic element 3108 may be set in a ring shape or a sheet shape. Regarding the shape of the second magnetic element 3108, reference may be made to the description elsewhere in the specification.
  • the second magnetic element 3108 may be coaxial with the first magnetic element 3102 and / or the first magnetically permeable element 3104.
  • An upper surface of the first magnetic element 3102 may be connected to a lower surface of the first magnetically conductive element 3104.
  • the lower surface of the first magnetic element 3102 can be connected to the bottom plate of the second magnetically conductive element 3106.
  • the lower surface of the second magnetic element 3108 is connected to the upper surface of the first magnetically conductive element 3104.
  • the connection manner between the first magnetic element 3102, the first magnetically permeable element 3104, the second magnetically permeable element 3106, and / or the second magnetic element 3108 may include one of bonding, snapping, welding, riveting, bolting, etc. or Multiple combinations.
  • a magnetic gap is formed between the first magnetic element 3102, the first magnetically permeable element 3104 and / or the second magnetic element 3108 and the side wall of the second magnetically permeable element 3106.
  • a voice coil may be provided in the magnetic gap.
  • the first magnetic element 3102, the first magnetically permeable element 3104, the second magnetically permeable element 3106, and the second magnetic element 3108 may form a magnetic circuit.
  • the magnetic circuit assembly 3100 may generate a first full magnetic field, and the first magnetic element 3102 may generate a second magnetic field.
  • the first full magnetic field is a magnetic field generated by all components in the magnetic circuit assembly 3100 (for example, the first magnetic element 3102, the first magnetically permeable element 3104, the second magnetically permeable element 3106, and the second magnetic element 3108) Together.
  • the magnetic field strength of the first full magnetic field in the magnetic gap (also referred to as magnetic induction intensity or magnetic flux density) is greater than the magnetic field strength of the second magnetic field in the magnetic gap.
  • the second magnetic element 3108 may generate a third magnetic field, and the third magnetic field may increase the magnetic field strength of the second magnetic field at the magnetic gap.
  • the included angle between the magnetization direction of the second magnetic element 3108 and the magnetization direction of the first magnetic element 3102 is between 90 degrees and 180 degrees. In some embodiments, the included angle between the magnetization direction of the second magnetic element 3108 and the magnetization direction of the first magnetic element 3102 is between 150 degrees and 180 degrees. In some embodiments, the magnetization direction of the second magnetic element 3108 is opposite to that of the first magnetic element 3102 (as shown in the figure, the a direction and the b direction).
  • the magnetic circuit assembly 3100 adds a second magnetic element 3108.
  • the magnetization direction of the second magnetic element 3108 is opposite to the magnetization direction of the first magnetic element 3102.
  • the magnetic leakage of the first magnetic element 3102 in the magnetization direction can be suppressed, so that the magnetic field generated by the first magnetic element 3102 can be more compressed to magnetic In the gap, the magnetic induction intensity in the magnetic gap is thus increased.
  • the magnetic element in the magnetic circuit assembly is not limited to the above-mentioned first magnetic element, second magnetic element, third magnetic element, fourth magnetic element, fifth magnetic element, sixth magnetic element, seventh magnetic element, and may also Increase or decrease the number of magnetic components. Such deformations are all within the protection scope of this application.
  • the speaker assembly device described above may also transmit sound to the user by means of air conduction.
  • the speaker assembly device may include one or more sound sources.
  • the sound source may be located at a specific position of the user's head, for example, the top of the head, forehead, cheeks, horns, auricles, back of auricle, etc., without blocking or covering the ear canal.
  • FIG. 33 shows a schematic diagram of transmitting sound through air conduction.
  • the sound source 3310 and the sound source 3320 can generate sound waves with opposite phases ("+" and "-" in the figure indicate opposite phases).
  • the sound source referred to here refers to a sound output hole on the speaker assembly device for outputting sound.
  • the sound source 3310 and the sound source 3320 may be two sound output holes respectively located at specific positions on the glasses (for example, the housing 104 in FIG. 16 or the circuit housing).
  • the sound source 3310 and the sound source 3320 may be generated by the same vibration device 3301.
  • the vibration device 3301 includes a diaphragm (not shown in the figure). When the diaphragm is driven by an electric signal to vibrate, the front of the diaphragm drives air to vibrate, and a sound source 3310 is formed at the sound outlet through the sound guide channel 3312. A sound source 3320 is formed at the hole.
  • the sound conducting channel refers to a sound propagation path from the diaphragm to the corresponding sound emitting hole.
  • the sound guiding channel is a path surrounded by a specific structure (for example, the housing 104 or the circuit housing in FIG. 16) on the speaker assembly. It should be known that, in some alternative embodiments, the sound source 3310 and the sound source 3320 may also be generated by different vibration devices through different diaphragm vibrations.
  • the sound transmitted to the user's ear may be referred to as near-field sound
  • the leaked sound transmitted to the environment may be referred to as far-field sound.
  • the near-field / far-field sounds of different frequencies generated by the speaker assembly device are related to the distance between the sound source 3310 and the sound source 3320.
  • the near-field sound generated by the speaker component device will increase as the distance between the two sound sources increases, and the far-field sound (leakage) generated will increase as the frequency increases.
  • the distance between the sound source 3310 and the sound source 3320 can be designed separately, so that the low-frequency near-field sound (for example, a sound with a frequency less than 800 Hz) generated by the speaker component device is as large as possible, and the high-frequency far-field sound ( For example, sounds with frequencies greater than 2000 Hz) are as small as possible.
  • the speaker assembly device may include two or more sets of dual sound sources. Each set of dual sound sources includes two sound sources similar to the sound source 3310 and the sound source 3320, and each generates a specific frequency. sound. Specifically, the first group of dual sound sources may be used to generate low-frequency sounds, and the second group of dual sound sources may be used to generate high-frequency sounds.
  • the distance between two sound sources in the first set of dual sound sources can be set to a larger value.
  • the low-frequency signal has a longer wavelength, a larger distance between the two sound sources will not cause an excessive phase difference in the far field, and therefore will not form too much sound leakage in the far field.
  • the distance between the two sound sources in the second set of dual sound sources can be set to a smaller value. Because the high-frequency signal has a shorter wavelength, a smaller distance between the two sound sources can prevent a large phase difference from being formed in the far field, and thus can prevent a large sound leakage.
  • the distance between the second group of dual sound sources is smaller than the distance between the first group of dual sound sources.
  • the beneficial effects of the embodiments of the present application include, but are not limited to: (1) In the present application, when the hinge arm is rotated relative to the hinge base by an external force, the hinge has a proper degree of jump, thereby providing convenience for users. (2) By adjusting the angle ⁇ between the normal A of the panel 103 or the normal A 'of the contact surface between the panel and the human skin and the straight line B where the driving force of the device is located, the sound quality of the speaker component can be improved; The overall rigidity of the body, the shell panel and the back of the shell can maintain the same or substantially the same amplitude and phase of vibration at a higher frequency, thereby reducing the sound leakage of the speaker component device; (4) by adding magnetic components to the magnetic circuit component The magnetically conductive element and the conductive element can improve the sensitivity of the speaker assembly device. It should be noted that different embodiments may have different beneficial effects. In different embodiments, the possible beneficial effects may be any one or a combination of the foregoing, or any other beneficial effects that may be obtained.
  • aspects of this application can be illustrated and described through several patentable categories or situations, including any new and useful process, machine, product or substance combination, or their Any new and useful improvements. Accordingly, various aspects of the present application can be executed entirely by hardware, can be executed entirely by software (including firmware, resident software, microcode, etc.), and can also be executed by a combination of hardware and software.
  • the above hardware or software can be referred to as a "module,” “unit,” “component,” or “system.”
  • aspects of the present application may manifest as a computer product located in one or more computer-readable media, the product including a computer-readable program code.
  • numbers describing components and the number of attributes are used. It should be understood that, for such numbers used in the description of the embodiments, the modifiers "about”, “approximately” or “substantially” are used in some examples To modify. Unless stated otherwise, “about”, “approximately” or “substantially” indicates that the number allows for a variation of ⁇ 20%. Accordingly, in some embodiments, the numerical data used in the specification and claims are approximate values, and the approximate values may be changed according to the characteristics required by individual embodiments. In some embodiments, the numerical data should take into account the specified significant digits and adopt the method of general digits retention. Although the numerical ranges and data used to confirm the breadth of the range in some embodiments of this application are approximate values, in specific embodiments, the setting of such values is as accurate as possible within the feasible range.

Landscapes

  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Acoustics & Sound (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Ophthalmology & Optometry (AREA)
  • Optics & Photonics (AREA)
  • Otolaryngology (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Manufacturing & Machinery (AREA)
  • Neurosurgery (AREA)
  • Eyeglasses (AREA)
  • Details Of Audible-Bandwidth Transducers (AREA)
  • Pivots And Pivotal Connections (AREA)

Abstract

一种眼镜，包括：眼镜架（10），眼镜架（10）包括眼镜框（11）以及两条眼镜腿（12，12），两条眼镜腿（12，12）分别与眼镜框（11）转动连接；两个扬声组件（20，20），两个扬声组件（20，20）分别通过两条眼镜腿（12，12）上的铰接组件（122）而连接到两条眼镜腿（12，12）上，并且铰接组件（122）能够转动，以改变每个扬声组件（20）相对于其所连接的眼镜腿（12）的位置，两个扬声组件（20，20）包括耳机芯（101）和耳机壳体（220），耳机壳体（220）包括面向人体一侧的外壳面板（222）和与外壳面板（222）相对的外壳背面（224）；以及两条眼镜腿（12，12）中的至少一条容纳控制电路或电池，控制电路或电池驱动耳机芯（101）振动以产生声音，耳机芯（101）的振动导致外壳面板（222）和外壳背面（224）振动，外壳面板（222）的振动具有第一相位，外壳背面（224）的振动具有第二相位，其中，在外壳面板（222）的振动和外壳背面（224）的振动频率在2000Hz～3000Hz时，第一相位和第二相位的差值的绝对值小于60度。通过铰接组件（122），将功能与眼镜连接起来，扩大了眼镜的用途。

Description

一种眼镜
优先权信息
本申请要求于2018年8月24日提交的中国申请号为201810975515.1的优先权，其全部内容通过引用的方式并入本文。
技术领域
本申请涉及眼镜领域，特别涉及一种具有铰链组件的眼镜。
背景技术
人们在日常生活中经常会佩戴眼镜，如近视眼镜、远视眼镜、太阳眼镜、VR眼镜、按摩眼镜等。但是这类眼镜功能单一，不能同时满足人们的多种需求。例如，在外出运动、旅游时，人们经常佩戴太阳眼镜，但如果同时也想要听音乐的话，就需要另外准备耳机，携带和收纳都不方便。因此，具有耳机功能的眼镜给用户带来了极大的便利。
发明内容
本说明书实施例提供一种眼镜，所述眼镜包括：眼镜架，所述眼镜架包括眼镜框以及两条眼镜腿，所述两条眼镜腿分别与所述眼镜框转动连接；两个扬声组件，所述两个扬声组件分别通过所述两条眼镜腿上的铰链组件连接到两条眼镜腿上，且所述铰链组件能够转动以改变每个扬声组件相对于其所连接的眼镜腿的位置，所述两个扬声组件包括耳机芯和耳机壳体，所述耳机壳体包括面向人体一侧的外壳面板和与所述外壳面板相对的外壳背面；以及所述两条眼镜腿中的至少一条容纳控制电路或电池，所述控制电路或电池驱动所述耳机芯振动以产生声音，所述耳机芯的振动导致所述外壳面板和所述外壳背面振动，所述外壳面板的振动具有第一相位，所述外壳背面的振动具有第二相位，其中，所述外壳面板的振动和所述外壳背面的振动频率在2000Hz到3000Hz时，所述第一相位和所述第二相位的差值的绝对值小于60度。
附图说明
本申请将以示例性实施例的方式进一步说明，这些示例性实施例将通过附图进行详细描述。这些实施例并非限制性的，在这些实施例中，相同的编号表示相同的结构，其中：
图1是根据本申请中一些实施例提供的眼镜的结构示意图；
图2是根据本申请中一些实施例提供的铰链组件结构示意图；
图3是根据本申请中一些实施例的爆炸结构示意图；
图4是图2中铰链组件沿A-A轴线的剖视图；
图5是根据本申请中一些实施例提供的铰链组件结构示意图；
图6是根据本申请中一些实施例提供的保护套管的原始状态图；
图7根据本申请中一些实施例提供的铰链组件的保护套管的原始状态的局部截面图；
图8是根据本申请中一些实施例提供的铰链组件的保护套管的弯折状态图；
图9是根据本申请中一些实施例提供的铰链组件保护套管的弯折状态的局部截面图；
图10是根据本申请中一些实施例提供的眼镜的局部剖面图；
图11是图10中A部分的放大图；
图12是图11中B部分的放大图；
图13是是根据本申请中一些实施例提供的眼镜的局部剖面图；
图14是图13中C部分的放大图；
图15是根据本申请中一些实施例提供的眼镜的爆炸结构图；
图16是根据本申请一些实施例提供的眼镜的应用场景及结构示意图；
图17根据是本申请一些实施例提供的一种夹角方向的示意图；
图18根据是本申请一些实施例提供的扬声组件作用于人体皮肤、骨骼的结构示意图；
图19是根据本申请一些实施例提供的扬声组件的夹角-相对位移关系图；
图20是根据本申请一些实施例提供的不同夹角θ时扬声组件的频率响应曲线低频段部分的示意图；
图21是根据本申请的一些实施例所示的扬声组件的纵截面示意图；
图22是根据本申请一些实施例提供的一个扬声组件的结构示意图；
图23是根据本申请一些实施例提供的另一个扬声组件的结构示意图；
图24是根据本申请一些实施例提供的又一个扬声组件的结构示意图；
图25是根据本申请一些实施例提供的扬声组件的壳体结构示意图；
图26是根据本申请一些实施例提供的扬声组件的结构示意图；
图27是根据本申请的一些实施例所示的一种磁路组件2100的纵截面示意图；
图28是根据本申请的一些实施例所示的磁路组件2600的纵截面示意图；
图29是根据本申请的一些实施例所示的一种磁路组件2700的纵截面示意图；
图30是根据本申请的一些实施例所示的一种磁路组件2900的纵截面示意图；
图31是根据本申请的一些实施例所示的一种磁路组件3000的纵截面示意图；
图32是根据本申请的一些实施例所示的一种磁路组件3100的纵截面示意图；以及
图33是根据本申请的一些实施例所示的通过气传导传递声音的示意图。
具体实施方式
为了更清楚地说明本申请的实施例的技术方案，下面将对实施例描述中所需要使用的附图作简单的介绍。显而易见地，下面描述中的附图仅仅是本申请的一些示例或实施例，对于本领域的普通技术人员来讲，在不付出创造性劳动的前提下，还可以根据这些附图将本申请应用于其他类似情景。应当理解，给出这些示例性实施例仅仅是为了使相关领域的技术人员能够更好地理解进而实现本发明，而并非以任何方式限制本发明的范围。除非从语言环境中显而易见或另做说明，图中相 同标号代表相同结构或操作。
如本申请和权利要求书中所示，除非上下文明确提示例外情形，“一”、“一个”、“一种”和/或“该”等词并非特指单数，也可包括复数。一般说来，术语“包括”与“包含”仅提示包括已明确标识的步骤和元素，而这些步骤和元素不构成一个排它性的罗列，方法或者设备也可能包含其他的步骤或元素。术语“基于”是“至少部分地基于”。术语“一个实施例”表示“至少一个实施例”；术语“另一实施例”表示“至少一个另外的实施例”。其他术语的相关定义将在下文描述中给出。以下，不失一般性，在描述本发明中声音传导相关技术时，将采用“播放器”、“扬声组件”、“扬声装置”或“扬声组件”的描述。该描述仅仅为声音传导应用的一种形式，对于该领域的普通技术人员来说，“播放器”、“播放装置”、“扬声组件”、“扬声装置”或“助听器”也可用其他同类词语代替。事实上，本发明中的各种实现方式可以很方便地应用到其它非扬声组件类的听力设备上。例如，对于本领域的专业人员来说，在了解扬声组件装置的基本原理后，可能在不背离这一原理的情况下，对实施扬声组件的具体方式与步骤进行形式和细节上的各种修正和改变，特别地，扬声组件中加入环境声音拾取和处理功能，使该扬声组件实现助听器的功能。例如，在使用扬声组件的情况下，加入可以拾取使用者/佩戴者周围环境的声音的麦克风等传声器，在一定的算法下，将声音处理后(或者产生的电信号)传送至扬声组件部分。即，扬声组件可以经过一定的修改，加入拾取环境声音的功能，并经过一定的信号处理后通过扬声组件部分将声音传递给使用者/佩戴者，从而实现助听器的功能。作为举例，这里所说的算法可以包括噪声消除、自动增益控制、声反馈抑制、宽动态范围压缩、主动环境识别、主动抗噪、定向处理、耳鸣处理、多通道宽动态范围压缩、主动啸叫抑制、音量控制等一种或多种的组合。
请参阅图1，图1是本申请眼镜一实施方式的结构示意图。本实施方式中，眼镜包括：眼镜架10及功能件20。
在一些实施例中，本申请中的眼镜架10可以包括近视镜、远视镜、太阳镜、3D眼镜等各种眼镜的眼镜架，在此不做限定。
功能件20可以是与眼镜架10连接在一起的，使眼镜进一步具有一些其它功能的组件或构件。例如，功能件20可以为扬声组件，可以包括骨传导扬声组件、气传导扬声组件等。作为示例，功能件20可以是骨传导扬声组件21，从而使得眼镜还具有骨传导扬声组件21的功能。当然，功能件20还可以为其它组件，如定位装置等，此处不做限定。
在一些实施例中，眼镜架10可以包括眼镜框11以及两条眼镜腿12，眼镜腿12可以与眼镜框11转动连接的镜腿主体121以及铰链组件122，扬声组件21可以通过铰链组件122连接到眼镜腿12上。
图2是本申请铰链组件一实施方式的结构示意图，图3是本申请铰链组件一实施方式的爆炸结构示意图。在一些实施例中，本申请铰链组件122可用于本申请实施方式中的眼镜当中。
本申请中，铰链组件122包括铰链30，铰链30是用来连接两个固体并允许两者之间做相对转动的结构。
具体地，本实施方式中的铰链组件122在用于上述眼镜实施方式中时，铰链组件122设置于镜腿主体121远离眼镜框11的端部，并进一步通过铰链30将功能件20连接至镜腿主体121远离眼镜框11的端部。
在一些实施例中，铰链组件122还可以包括杆状件40和固定件50。在一些实施例中，铰链30可以包括铰链座31以及铰链臂32，在一些实施例中，铰链臂32通过转轴33与铰链座31转动连接。容易理解地，铰链座31与铰链臂32可分别连接在需要转动连接的两个构件上，以使得两个构件通过铰链30的转轴33转动连接在一起。
在一些实施例中，铰链30的铰链座31连接设置在杆状件40上。在一些实施例中，杆状件40可以是通过铰链30转动连接的两个构件中的一个的部分结构或者整体结构，或者也可以是需要转动连接的两个构件中的一个与铰链30进行连接的连接结构。本实施方式中的铰链组件122在用于眼镜时，杆状件40可以为眼镜的镜腿主体121的至少一部分，例如可以是镜腿主体121的全部，或者是镜腿主体121远离眼镜框11的一端的一部分，进而通过该部分镜腿主体121，将铰链30设置于镜腿主体121远离眼镜框11的端部。
具体地，杆状件40沿长度方向设置有与杆状件40的端面连通的铰链腔41，杆状件40的侧壁上设置有与铰链腔41连通的第一插置孔42，铰链座31的远离铰链臂32的一端从杆状件40的端面插入至铰链腔41，并由插置在第一插置孔42内的固定件50固定在铰链腔41内。
本实施方式中，铰链腔41连通镜腿主体121远离眼镜框11的端部的端面，从而使得铰链座31插入至铰链腔41内而将铰链30与镜腿主体121连接。
在一些实施例中，可在杆状件40成型过程中形成铰链腔41，例如，杆状件40的材质可以为橡胶或者塑料等，此时可通过注塑形成铰链腔41。铰链腔41的形状与铰链座31匹配，以使得铰链座31能够容置于铰链腔41内。在本实施方式中，镜腿主体121沿长度方向可以为长直杆状，对应地，杆状件40则可以为沿长度方向的直杆，铰链腔41设置于直杆中，进一步地，铰链座31与铰链腔41匹配以容置于铰链腔41内进而实现铰链30的安装。当然，在其它实施方式中，杆状件40也可以为弧形杆等其它形状。
另外，第一插置孔42也可由杆状件40在成型过程中形成，或者在成型后进一步通过钻孔等方法在杆状件的侧壁上形成。具体地，本实施方式中，第一插置孔42的形状可以为圆形，在其它实施方式中还可以为方形、三角形等其它形状。固定件50的形状与第一插置孔42匹配，以使得固定件50能够从杆状件40的外部插入第一插置孔42，并进而通过抵紧铰链座31的侧壁的方式，或者进一步穿透铰链座31的外壁以插接的方式等将铰链座31固定在铰链腔41内。具体地，可以在第一插置孔42的内壁与固定件50的外壁上设置匹配的螺纹，以使得固定件50能够通过螺接的方式与第一插置孔42连接以进一步将铰链座31固定在铰链腔41内。当然，也可以通过其它方式，例如通过第一插置孔42与固定件50的过盈配合等方式进行连接。
进一步地，铰链臂32还可与其它构件连接，从而使得该构件在于铰链臂32连接后，进一步通过将铰链座31装设在杆状件40的铰链腔41内从而与杆状件40或者与杆状件40连接的其它 构件之间能够绕转轴33进行转动。例如，铰链组件122在应用于上述眼镜中时，功能件20(例如扬声组件21)连接设置在铰链臂32远离铰链座31一端，从而通过铰链30连接在镜腿主体121远离眼镜框11的端部。
上述方式中，杆状件40上设置有与该杆状件40的端面连通的铰链腔41，铰链30通过将铰链座31容置于该铰链腔41内，并进一步将固定件50通过第一插置孔42穿透杆状件40的侧壁从而将容置于铰链腔41内的铰链座31固定在铰链腔41内，从而能够实现铰链30相对于杆状件40可拆装，以方便铰链30或者杆状件40的更换。在应用于本申请上述眼镜实施方式中的眼镜当中时，能够实现铰链30与功能件20相对于镜腿主体121可拆装，从而在功能件20或眼镜框11、镜腿主体121等损坏时，便于进行更换。
进一步地，请继续参阅图3，在一实施方式中，铰链座31上设置有与第一插置孔42对应的第二插置孔311，固定件50进一步插置于第二插置孔311内。
具体地，第二插置孔311的形状与固定件50匹配，以使得固定件50在穿过第一插置孔42后，进一步插入第二插置孔311中以将铰链座31固定，从而减少铰链座31在铰链腔41内的晃动，使得铰链30固定得更加牢固。具体地，与第一插置孔42和固定件50的连接方式相似，第二插置孔311的内侧壁上可设置有与固定件50对应的外壁上互相匹配的螺纹，以使得固定件50与铰链座31螺接在一起；或者，第二插置孔311的内壁与固定件50的对应接触的位置处的外侧壁均为平滑的面，固定件50与第二插置孔311过盈配合，此处不做具体限定。
进一步地，第二插置孔311还可贯穿铰链座31的两侧边设置，从而使得固定件50能够进一步穿透整个铰链座31，以将铰链座31更加牢固得固定在铰链腔41内。
请进一步参阅图4，图4是图2中铰链组件122沿A-A轴线的剖视图。本实施方式中，在垂直于杆状件40的长度方向的截面上，铰链座31的截面形状与铰链腔41的截面形状相匹配，以使得在插入后铰链座31与杆状件40之间形成密封配合。
在一些实施例中，在图4中所示的截面上，铰链座31的截面形状和铰链腔41的截面形状可以为任意形状，只要能够使得铰链座31从杆状件40的远离铰链臂32的端面插入至该铰链腔41中即可。进一步地，第一插置孔42设置在铰链腔41的侧壁上，并贯通铰链腔41的侧壁与铰链腔41连通。
在一个应用场景中，铰链座31的截面形状和铰链腔41的截面形状均呈矩形设置，第一插置孔42垂直于矩形的一侧边设置。
具体地，本应用场景中，可以进一步对铰链座31外侧壁的棱角或铰链腔41的内侧壁的角倒圆角设置，使得铰链座31与铰链腔41的接触更加平滑，从而使得铰链座31能够顺利得插入至铰链腔41内。
需要进一步指出的是，在铰链30装配前，铰链腔41内存储有一定量的气体，因此若铰链腔41仅为一端开口的腔体，那么在装配过程当中将会由于铰链腔41内的气体难以排出而不利于铰链座31插入，从而影响装配。本实施方式中的第一插置孔42贯通铰链腔41的侧壁而与铰链腔41 连通，能够在装配过程中辅助将内部的气体通过铰链腔41由第一插置孔42排出，从而有助于铰链30的正常装配。
请进一步参阅图5，图5是本申请铰链组件一实施方式的结构示意图。本申请铰链组件122实施方式中，铰链组件122进一步包括设置于铰链30外侧的连接线60。
在一些实施例中，连接线60可以为具有电性连接作用和/或机械连接作用的连接线60。在应用于本申请上述眼镜实施方式中的眼镜当中时，铰链组件122用于将功能件20连接于镜腿主体121远离眼镜框11的端部，而与功能件20相关的控制电路等可设置于镜腿主体121当中，此时，需要连接线60将功能件20与镜腿主体121中的控制电路等电连接在一起。具体地，连接线60可位于铰链座31和铰链臂32的一侧，与铰链30设置于同一容置空间当中。
进一步地，铰链座31包括第一端面312，铰链臂32具有与第一端面312相对设置的第二端面321，容易理解地，第一端面312和第二端面321之间存在一定的间隙，以使得铰链座31和铰链臂32能够绕转轴33进行相对转动。本实施方式中，在铰链臂32与铰链座31进行相对转动过程中，第一端面312与第二端面321之间也随之发生相对位置的变化，从而使得二者之间的间隙变大或者变小。
而本实施方式中，第一端面312与第二端面321之间的间隙始终保持为大于或小于连接线60的直径，从而使得位于铰链30外侧的连接线60不至于在铰链座31与铰链臂32的相对转动过程中夹入第一端面312与第二端面321之间的间隙中，进而减少铰链对连接线60的损伤。具体地，第一端面312与第二端面321之间的间隙在铰链臂32与铰链座31进行相对转动过程中与连接线60的直径的比例可始终保持为大于1.5或小于0.8，例如大于1.5、1.7、1.9、2.0等，或小于0.8、0.6、0.4、0.2等，此处不做具体限定。
请一并参阅图2、图6至图9，图6是本申请铰链组件一实施方式中保护套管的原始状态图，图7是本申请铰链组件一实施方式中保护套管的原始状态的局部截面图，图8是本申请铰链组件一实施方式中保护套管的弯折状态图，图9是本申请铰链组件一实施方式中保护套管的弯折状态的局部截面图。本实施方式中，铰链组件122还可以包括保护套管70。
具体地，该保护套管70套设在铰链30的外围，并随铰链30发生弯折。在一些实施例中，保护套管70可以包括沿保护套管70的长度方向间隔设置的多个环状凸脊部71以及设置于环状凸脊部71之间并用于连接相邻设置的两个环状凸脊部的环状连接部72，在一些实施例中，环状凸脊部71的管壁厚度大于环状连接部72的管壁厚度。
在一些实施例中，保护套管70的长度方向可以与铰链30的长度方向一致，保护套管70可沿铰链座31和铰链臂32的长度方向设置。该保护套管70可以由软质材料做成，例如软质的硅胶、橡胶等。
环状凸脊部71可由保护套管70的外侧壁进一步向外凸出形成，而环状凸脊部71对应的保护套管70的内侧壁的形状此处不做具体限定。例如，内侧壁可以为平滑的，或者内侧壁上对应环状凸脊部71的位置还可设置凹陷等。
环状连接部72用于连接相邻的环状凸脊部71，具体连接于环状凸脊部71的靠近保护套管70内部的边缘区域，从而在保护套管70的外侧壁一侧可相对于环状凸脊部71呈凹陷设置。
具体地，环状凸脊部71和环状连接部72的数量可以根据实际使用情况而定，例如，可以根据保护套管70的长度、环状凸脊部71和环状连接部72本身在保护套管70长度方向上的宽度等情况设定。
进一步地，环状凸脊部71和环状连接部72的管壁厚度分别是指环状凸脊部71和环状连接部72所对应的保护套管70的内侧壁与外侧壁之间的厚度。本实施方式中，环状凸脊部71的管壁厚度大于环状连接部72的管壁厚度。
容易理解地，在铰链30的铰链座31和铰链臂32之间绕转轴33相对转动时，铰链座31和铰链臂32之间的角度发生变化，从而使得保护套管70发生弯折，如图8和图9中所示。具体地，在保护套管70随铰链30发生弯折时，位于保护套管70所形成的弯折形状的外侧区域的环状凸脊部71和环状连接部72处于拉伸状态，而位于弯折形状的内侧区域的环状凸脊部71和环状连接部72处于挤压状态。
本实施方式中，环状凸脊部71的管壁厚度大于环状连接部72的管壁厚度，从而使得环状凸脊部71相对于环状连接部72更硬，从而在保护套管70处于弯折状态时，处于弯折形状的外部一侧的保护套管70处于拉伸状态，环状凸脊部71能够为保护套管70提供一定的强度支撑；同时，处于弯折状态的内部一侧的保护套管70区域受到挤压，环状凸脊部71还能够承受一定的挤压力，从而对保护套管70起到保护作用，提高保护套管70的稳定性，延长保护套管70的寿命。
进一步地，需要指出的是，保护套管70的形状与铰链30所处的状态一致。在一个应用场景中，保护套管70的沿长度方向上且绕转轴转动的两侧都可能受到拉伸或者挤压。在另一个应用场景中，铰链30的铰链座31和铰链臂32仅能够绕转轴33在小于或等于180°的范围内进行转动，也就是说，保护套管70仅能够朝向一侧进行弯折，那么保护套管70的沿长度方向上的两侧中有一侧可受到挤压，另一侧可受到拉伸，此时，可以根据保护套管70两侧受力的不同，而将保护套管70受力不同的两侧设置为不同的结构。
在一实施方式中，环状凸脊部71在保护套管70处于弯折状态时朝向保护套管70所形成的弯折形状外部一侧的沿保护套管70长度方向的宽度大于朝向弯折形状内部一侧的沿保护套管70长度方向的宽度。
在一些实施例中，沿保护套管70长度方向上，增大环状凸脊部71的宽度能够进一步提高保护套管的强度。同时，本实施方式中，铰链座31和铰链臂32之间的初始夹角的角度小于180°，此时，若保护套管70的环状凸脊部71均匀设置，则会使得保护套管70在原始状态下便受到挤压。本实施方式中，对应于弯折状态时朝向弯折形状的外侧区域一侧的环状凸脊部71的宽度较大，从而能够扩大该侧保护套管70的长度，从而在提高保护套管70的强度的同时，还使得在保护套管70弯折时，在一定程度上减少拉伸侧的拉伸程度；同时，环状凸脊部71在保护套管70处于弯折状态时朝向弯折形状的内侧区域一侧的沿保护套管70长度方向的宽度较小，能够增大挤压的环状连接部 72在保护套管70长度方向上的空间，从而能够在一定程度上缓解挤压侧的挤压。
进一步地，在一个应用场景中，环状凸脊部71的宽度在从朝向弯折形状的外侧区域一侧向朝向弯折形状的内部区域一侧逐渐变小，从而使得保护套管70处于弯折状态时朝向保护套管70所形成的弯折形状的外侧区域一侧的宽度大于朝向弯折形状的内侧区域一侧的宽度。
容易理解地，环状凸脊部71围绕设置在保护套管70的外围，在保护套管70的长度方向上，一侧对应拉伸侧，另一侧对应挤压侧。本实施方式中，环状凸脊部71的宽度从朝向弯折形状的外侧区域一侧向朝向弯折形状的内侧区域一侧逐渐变小，从而使得宽度的较为均匀，能够在一定程度上提高保护套管70的稳定性。
在一实施方式中，环状凸脊部71在保护套管70处于弯折状态时朝向保护套管70所形成的弯折形状的外侧区域一侧的保护套管70内部的内环面设置有凹槽711。
具体地，本实施方式中的凹槽711沿垂直于保护套管70的长度方向设置，进而使得对应的环状凸脊部71在保护套管70在长度方向上受到拉伸时能够进行适当的伸展。
如上所述，在保护套管70处于弯折状态时，朝向保护套管70所形成的弯折形状外部一侧的保护套管70处于拉伸状态，本实施方式中，进一步在对应的环状凸脊部71对应的保护套管70内部的内环面上设置凹槽711，从而能够在该侧保护套管拉伸时，凹槽711对应的环状凸脊部71能够适当伸展以承担部分拉伸，从而减少该侧保护套管所受到的拉力，进而对保护套管70起到保护作用。
需要指出的是，在保护套管70处于弯折状态时，朝向弯折形状的内侧区域的一侧的环状凸脊部71可在对应的保护套管70的内侧壁上不设置凹槽711。在一实施方式中，凹槽71沿保护套管70长度方向的宽度在从朝向弯折形状的外侧区域一侧向朝向弯折形状的内侧区域一侧逐渐变小，从而使得在朝向弯折形状的内侧区域一侧的环状凸脊部71所对应的保护套管70的内侧壁上没有凹槽711设置。
具体地，在本实施方式中的铰链组件122应用于本申请眼镜实施方式中的眼镜当中时，保护套管70可以与分别设置在保护套管70的长度方向上的两侧的镜腿主体121以及功能件20连接在一起。在一个应用场景中，保护套管70还可以为眼镜中的其它结构如一些部件的保护盖层等一体成型，从而使得眼镜更加封闭、一体。
需要指出的是，本申请中铰链组件实施方式中的铰链组件122不仅仅可以用于本申请眼镜实施方式中的眼镜，还可以用于其它装置当中，而且铰链组件122还可以包括除了上述杆状件40、固定件50、连接线60、保护套管70等之外的其它与铰链30相关联的构件以实现相应的功能。
具体地，请进一步一并参阅图10至图14，图10是本申请铰链一实施方式的局部剖面图，图11是图10中A部分的放大图，图12是图11中B部分在由第一支撑面与第三支撑面抵接向第二支撑面与第三支撑面抵接转变而使得第一支撑面与第二支撑面的连接处与第三支撑面初始接触时的放大图，图13是本申请铰链一实施方式的局部剖面图，图14是图13中C部分的放大图。需要指出的是，本申请铰链实施方式中的铰链30可用于本申请眼镜实施方式中的眼镜当中，也可用于 本申请铰链组件实施方式中的铰链组件122，还可以应用于其它装置当中，此处不做具体限定。
本实施方式中，铰链30的铰链臂32具有彼此连接的第一支撑面322和第二支撑面323。
铰链30还包括支撑件34和弹性件35。支撑件34活动设置于铰链座31上，且具有第三支撑面341，弹性件35用于将支撑件34朝向铰链臂32进行弹性偏置，以使得第三支撑面341能够分别弹性抵接于第一支撑面322和第二支撑面323上。
在一些实施例中，在铰链臂32受到外力作用而相对铰链座31进行转动时，由第一支撑面322和第二支撑面323的连接处324推动支撑件34克服弹性件35的弹性偏置而反向移动，进而使得第三支撑面341从与第一支撑面322和第二支撑面323中的一者弹性抵接切换到与第一支撑面322和第二支撑面323中的另一者弹性抵接。
在一个应用场景中，支撑件34连接设置在弹性件35朝向铰链臂32的一端，且使得第三支撑面341朝向铰链臂32一侧，在铰链臂32受到外力作用而绕转轴33相对铰链座31转动的过程中，能够推动第三支撑面341而使得支撑件34压迫弹性件35，并进一步在弹性件35的作用下发生弹性偏置。当然，支撑件34也可以与弹性件35不连接，而仅仅是抵接在支撑件34的一侧，只要能够使得支撑件34实现上述弹性偏置即可。
在一些实施例中，第一支撑面322和第二支撑面323分别为铰链臂32的相邻的且至少部分与转轴33的中轴线平行的两个侧面，或者是两个侧面的一部分，在铰链臂32相对铰链座31转动时，第一支撑面322和第二支撑面323随铰链臂32围绕转轴33发生转动，从而使得铰链臂32的不同侧面朝向铰链座31，进而使得铰链臂32相对于铰链座31能够具有不同的相对位置关系。
另外，弹性件35为能够提供弹力且能够在弹力方向上压缩以提供一定的压缩空间的构件。例如，弹性件35可以为弹簧，弹簧的一端抵接支撑件34，在支撑件34的第三支撑面341受到朝向弹性件35的推动作用时，弹性件35反抗支撑件34并发生压缩从而为支撑件34的第三支撑面341所朝向的方向上提供空间，以使得在转轴33的相对位置不变时，仍有足够的空间使得铰链臂32不同的侧面转动至转轴33与第三支撑面341之间。
具体地，在铰链臂32相对于铰链座31转动时，转轴33的相对位置不发生改变，铰链臂32与铰链座31的第三支撑面341的接触位置发生变化，而由于铰链臂32的不同的位置到转轴33的距离不同，因此，在铰链臂32的不同的位置如第一支撑面322和第二支撑面323的不同位置与第三支撑面341接触时，所述需要的转轴33到铰链臂32与第三支撑面341的接触点之间的空间不同。而受弹力作用以及空间等的限制，弹性件35压缩而提供的空间可能是有限的。因此，在铰链臂32相对于铰链座31转动的过程中，在垂直于转轴33的中轴线的截面上若铰链臂32上某一位置与转轴33的距离过大，该位置在转动过程中将会卡持于第三支撑面上的另一位置而无法使得铰链臂32继续转动，从而使得铰链臂32和铰链座31仅能够在一定的范围内相对转动。在一个应用场景中，在铰链臂32与铰链座31之间绕转轴33相对转动的过程中，仅有第一支撑面322与第二支撑面323以及第一支撑面322与第二支撑面323的连接处324所对应的区域能够与第三支撑面341抵接。
进一步地，本实施方式中，第一支撑面322和第二支撑面323可以均为平面，转轴33到二者的连接处324的距离均大于转轴33到第一支撑面322的距离和到第二支撑面323的距离，铰链30可具有第三支撑面341抵接于第一支撑面322，以及第三支撑面341抵接于第二支撑面323两种相对稳定的状态。
当然，在本实施方式中，第一支撑面322和第二支撑面323也可能是具有一定弧度的曲面，甚或还可包括不同的子支撑面，只要能够使得铰链臂32和铰链座31之间的位置关系具有对应的至少两种相对稳定的状态即可，此处不做具体限定。另外，铰链臂32上还可以设置其它更多的支撑面，以在铰链臂32受到外力而绕转轴33与铰链座31之间发生相对转动时，通过铰链臂32上不同的支撑面与第三支撑面341发生弹性抵接而使得铰链臂32与铰链座31之间具有多种不同的相对位置关系，此处不做具体限定。
具体地，以初始状态为第一支撑面322与支撑件34的第三支撑面341抵接为例，具体如图11和图12中所示。此时弹性件35可以具有弹性压缩形变，也可以处于原始的自然状态，此处不做限定。在铰链30受到外力作用而使得铰链臂32绕转轴33与铰链座31发生相对转动以使得第二支撑面323逐渐靠近第三支撑面341时，第一支撑面322和第二支撑面323的连接处324与第三支撑面341接触，由于连接处324到转轴33的距离大于第一支撑面322到转轴33的距离，从而使得连接处324抵接支撑件34并推动支撑件34移动朝弹性件35的方向移动，进而使得弹性件35克服推力而产生压缩。且在铰链臂32进一步受力时，连接处324逐渐靠近转轴33的与第三支撑面341之间的区域，在此过程中，转轴33到第三支撑面341之间的距离逐渐增大；容易理解地，在连接处324与转轴33的连线垂直于第三支撑面341时，在垂直于转轴33的中轴线的截面上，转轴33到第三支撑面341的距离等于转轴33到连接处324的距离，此时转轴33距离第三支撑面341最远；而在此时，若继续对铰链30施力，则转轴33到第三支撑面341的距离将会逐渐变小，从而所需要的弹性件35压缩的空间减小，并进而使得弹性件35逐渐释放弹力而回复，直到连接处324离开第三支撑面341而使得第二支撑面323与第三支撑面341抵接，从而实现从第一支撑面322与第三支撑面341抵接到第二支撑面323与第三支撑面341抵接之间的切换。
同样地，在初始状态为第二支撑面323与支撑件34的第三支撑面341抵接而向第一支撑面322与支撑件34的第三支撑面341抵接转换的过程(具体如图13和图14中所示)与上述过程类似。
需要指出的是，本实施方式中的铰链30可应用于本申请眼镜实施方式中的铰链组件122当中。在第三支撑面341从与第一支撑面322和第二支撑面323中的一者弹性抵接切换到与第一支撑面322和第二支撑面323中的另一者弹性抵接时，铰链组件122带动扬声组件21相对于镜腿主体121能够在第一相对固定位置和第二相对固定位置之间进行切换，并在扬声组件21处于第一相对固定位置时能够贴合于用户的耳廓背面。其中，耳廓为外耳的一部分，主要由软骨构成。在一些实施方式中，扬声组件21可以为骨传导扬声组件，通过将扬声组件贴合至耳廓背面，进而可利用耳廓的软骨传递骨传导声音/振动。将骨传导扬声组件在耳廓背面贴合，在提高音质的同时，还能够减小声 音传递过程中对耳道的影响。
需要指出的是，转轴33到连接处324的距离均大于到第一支撑面322和第二支撑面323的垂直距离，从而使得在第三支撑面341从与第一支撑面322和第二支撑面323中的一者弹性抵接切换到与第一支撑面322和第二支撑面323中的另一者弹性抵接的过程中铰链30的状态发生一定程度的跳变。
以第一支撑面322与第三支撑面341弹性抵接切换到第二支撑面323与第三支撑面341弹性抵接为例，转轴33到连接处324的最大距离h1与转轴33到第一支撑面322的最短距离h2之间的比例不同时，切换过程中产生的跳变的程度不同。
在一实施方式中，在垂直于转轴33的中轴线的截面上，转轴33到连接处324的最大距离h1与转轴33到第一支撑面322的最短距离h2之间的比例介于1.1和1.5之间。
具体地，可以通过将转轴33远离第二支撑面323而靠近与第二支撑面323相对的铰链臂32的一侧面设置，来实现转轴33到连接处324的最大距离h1大于转轴33到第一支撑面322的最短距离h2，进而满足上述比例。
需要指出的是，h1与h2之间的比例过大时，跳变明显，但是可能需要施加较大的力度才能够将第一支撑面322与第三支撑面341弹性抵接切换到第二支撑面323与第三支撑面341弹性抵接，从而在一定程度上为使用带来不便；而h1与h2之间的比例过小时，虽然状态的切换较为容易，但是可能跳变程度较小，例如在用户扳动铰链30时没有明显的触感，从而也会带来不便。本实施方式中的将h1与h2的比例设置为介于1.1和1.5之间，能够使得第三支撑面341从与第一支撑面322弹性抵接切换到与第二支撑面323弹性抵接时，铰链30的具有较为明显的跳变，从而使得在使用过程中，用户扳动铰链30时具有较为明显的手感，同时也不至于跳变状态太突兀而使得用户难以切换铰链30的状态。
在一个应用场景中，h1与h2的比例还可以介于1.2和1.4之间，具体地，h1与h2的比例还可以为1.1、1.2、1.3、1.4、1.5等，此处不做具体限定。
另外，第一支撑面322与第二支撑面323在铰链臂32上的位置的设置会影响第三支撑面341与第一支撑面322或第二支撑面323中的一者抵接时铰链臂32与铰链座31之间的夹角的角度，因此，可根据具体的使用需求，而对第一支撑面322与第二支撑面323在铰链臂32上的位置进行不同的设置。在一些实施例中，铰链臂32与铰链座31之间的夹角具体如图9和图12所示，ω1为第三支撑面341与第一支撑面322抵接时铰链臂32与铰链座31之间的夹角，ω2为第三支撑面341与第二支撑面323抵接时铰链臂32与铰链座31之间的夹角。在一实施方式中，铰链臂32与铰链座31均具有一定的长度，铰链臂32设置在铰链座31的长度方向上的端部一侧，第一支撑面322设置在铰链臂32长度方向上靠近铰链座31的端部，而第二支撑面323设置在铰链臂32宽度方向上的一端，且均平行于转轴33的中轴线设置。此时，当第三支撑面341与第一支撑面322弹性抵接时，铰链臂32与铰链座31之间的夹角最大，而在第三支撑面341与第二支撑面323弹性抵接时，铰链臂32与铰链座31之间的夹角最小，从而在第三支撑面341从与第一支撑面322弹性抵接切换 到与第二支撑面323弹性抵接时，铰链座31与铰链臂32之间的夹角由ω1变为ω2而变小。
需要进一步指出的是，若将第三支撑面341从与第一支撑面322弹性抵接切换到与第二支撑面323弹性抵接时对铰链臂32所施加的力的方向与铰链臂32自身重力的方向一致，那么在该状态的切换会使得铰链座31与铰链臂32之间的夹角变小时，本实施方式中上述h1与h2之间的比例的设置还可以使得在第三支撑面341与第一支撑面322弹性抵接时，铰链臂32不会或者难以因自身重力而自发得减小其与铰链座31之间的角度。
在本申请铰链一实施方式中，请参阅图12，在垂直于转轴33的中轴线的截面上，第一支撑面322和第二支撑面323之间的夹角ω3为钝角。
在一些实施例中，铰链30在由第一支撑面322与第三支撑面341弹性抵接的状态向第二支撑面323与第三支撑面341弹性抵接的状态切换时，第一支撑面322和第二支撑面323之间的夹角ω3越小，则状态切换时铰链座31和铰链臂32之间相对需要转动的角度越大，也就是说，在铰链座31固定不动时，用户需要将铰链臂32扳动较大的角度才能够对铰链30进行状态切换，从而用户使用费力，给用户使用带来不便。
而由于铰链臂32具有一定的长度，且第一支撑面322设置于铰链臂32的长度方向上的一端，而第二支撑面323与第一支撑面322相邻设置于铰链臂32的宽度方向上。通常情况下，第一支撑面322与第二支撑面323垂直设置，此时，在铰链30在上述两种状态之间进行切换时，需要将铰链臂32与铰链座31相对扳动90°。
而本实施方式中，在垂直于转轴33的中轴线的截面上，第一支撑面322和第二支撑面323之间的夹角ω3为钝角，从而在铰链30于两种状态之间切换时，所铰链臂32与铰链座31所需要相对扳动的角度小于90°，从而能够在一定程度上为用户提供便利。
具体地，在本实施方式中的铰链30用于本申请眼镜实施方式中时，铰链30用于连接镜腿主体121和扬声组件21。在一些实施例中，扬声组件21可以为骨传导扬声组件。例如，在铰链30处于第二支撑面323与第三支撑面341弹性抵接的第二状态时，扬声组件21处于第一相对固定位置以贴合于用户的耳廓背面，因此在用户需要使用眼镜的扬声组件21的功能时，仅需要将扬声组件21转动小于90°的角度即可将其贴合于用户的耳廓背面；另外，在铰链30处于第一支撑面322与第三支撑面341弹性抵接的第一状态时，铰链臂32和连接的扬声组件21形成一定的角度，从而在用户佩戴眼镜时，铰链臂32和连接的扬声组件21能够位于用户耳后且朝向用户耳朵的方向设置，从而能够对眼镜起到一定的阻拦、固定作用，不易从用户头部掉落。
需要指出的是，第一支撑面322和第二支撑面323之间的夹角ω3的具体角度可以根据实际需要进行设定。在该夹角的角度过大时，铰链臂32和连接于铰链臂32远离铰链座31的端部的功能件20与铰链座31之间的夹角将较小，从而在用户佩戴时，铰链臂32与功能件20会因过于靠近用户耳朵而对用户耳朵造成压迫，降低用户的舒适度；而若夹角的角度过小，一方面用户在扳动扬声组件21而使其在第一相对位置与第二相对位置之间进行切换时，所需要扳动的角度过大，用户使用不方便，另一方面，镜腿主体121与铰链30和扬声组件21之间所形成的夹角较小而难以起到 对眼镜的阻拦、固定的作用，从而使得用户佩戴眼镜时，眼镜容易从用户头部前侧掉落。具体地，可以根据用户的头型设置第一支撑面322和第二支撑面323之间的夹角的具体角度。
具体地，在一个应用场景中，在垂直于转轴33的中轴线的截面上，第一支撑面322和第二支撑面323之间的夹角ω3的角度介于100°和120°之间，具体可以为100°、110°、120°等。该角度的设置，能够使得用户在佩戴眼镜且扬声组件21处于第一相对固定位置时，扬声组件21不会过于靠近用户耳朵而对用户耳朵造成不适，且在对扬声组件21的两种相对位置进行切换时也无需将铰链转动过大的角度，从而方便用户使用。
在一些实施例中，在第三支撑面341从与第一支撑面322和第二支撑面323中的一者弹性抵接切换到与第一支撑面322和第二支撑面323中的另一者弹性抵接的过程当中，第一支撑面322和第二支撑面323之间的连接处324抵接第三支撑面341，并推动支撑件34克服弹性件35的弹性偏置而反向移动。以切换前第三支撑面341与第一支撑面322弹性抵接为例，在初始切换时，第一支撑面322逐渐远离第三支撑面341的同时，连接处324逐渐抵接第三支撑面341，并在切换过程中，由第三支撑面341的一侧滑动至第三支撑面341的另一侧，最后进一步过渡至由第二支撑面323与第三支撑面341弹性抵接。在状态切换过程中，连接处324始终与第三支撑面341抵接而相互作用，而连接处324的形状会对状态切换过程产生一定的影响。例如，若第一支撑面322与第二支撑面323之间线连接，那么，连接处324具有较为尖锐的角度，从而在用户扳动铰链座31和/或铰链臂32以进行铰链30的状态切换过程中，一方面，在连接处324与第三支撑面341抵接与连接处324与第一支撑面322和第二支撑面323抵接进行切换时，缓冲较小，切换突兀，从而扳动铰链30的手感差；另一方面，连接处324较为尖锐，会在反复的切换过程中对第三支撑面341造成一定的磨损。
而本申请一实施方式中，在垂直于转轴33的中轴线的截面上，连接处324呈弧形设置。从而使得第一支撑面322与第二支撑面323的连接为弧面连接，进而在铰链30的状态切换的过程当中，与第三支撑面341抵接的连接处324较为平滑，从而用户扳动铰链30时具有较好的手感，而且能够减少在反复的切换过程中对第三支撑面341的损伤。
具体地，在一实施方式中，连接处324呈圆弧设置，而圆弧的曲率不同，其所带来的效果也不同，具体的曲率值需要结合实际使用情况进行设置。本实施方式中圆弧的曲率介于5与30之间，具体还可以为5、10、15、20、25、30等，此处不做限定。
需要指出的是，在本实施方式中的铰链30应用于上述眼镜实施方式中的眼镜时，圆弧设置的连接处324的曲率能够使得用户在扳动铰链30以使得扬声组件在第一相对固定位置与第二相对固定位置之间切换时，具有较好的手感。
在一实施方式中，第三支撑面341设置成使得在第三支撑面341从与第一支撑面322弹性抵接切换到与第二支撑面323弹性抵接时所需的外力不同于在第三支撑面341从与第二支撑面323弹性抵接切换到与第一支撑面322弹性抵接时所需的外力。
需要指出的是，在具体的使用场景当中，铰链30不同的状态所对应的铰链30、或者铰链30所连接的结构的功能不同，或者由于铰链30设置的位置问题，而使得某一种状态向另一种状态 进行切换时不便于用户施力等原因，而在用户对铰链30的状态进行切换时需要在扳动铰链30的力度上进行区分，以方便用户施力，或者为用户区分两种铰链状态提供直观的感受等。
具体地，在本实施方式中的铰链30应用于上述眼镜中时，铰链30状态的切换会带动扬声组件21相对于镜腿主体121在第一相对固定位置和第二相对固定位置之间进行切换。对应地，两种相对固定位置分别对应用户使用扬声组件21和用户不使用扬声组件21两种情况，而用户在佩戴眼镜时，手在头部后侧施力以切换两种状态时施力的难易程度并不相同，因此，对应地将不同状态的切换设计为需要施加不同的外力，能够方面用户使用。
具体地，在一实施方式中，当第三支撑面341从与第一支撑面322弹性抵接切换到与第二支撑面323弹性抵接时，对应于将扬声组件21由第二相对固定位置扳动至第一相对固定位置从而贴合于用户的耳廓背面。
进一步地，本实施方式中，第三支撑面341设置成使得在第三支撑面341从与第一支撑面322弹性抵接切换到与第二支撑面323弹性抵接时所需的外力小于在第三支撑面341从与第二支撑面323弹性抵接切换到与第一支撑面322弹性抵接时所需的外力。
需要指出的是，在应用于上述眼镜时，在使用扬声组件21时，需要将第三支撑面341从与第一支撑面322弹性抵接切换到与第二支撑面323弹性抵接，而在不使用扬声组件21时，需要将第三支撑面341从与第二支撑面323弹性抵接切换到与第三支撑面341弹性抵接，根据本实施方式，在用户使用扬声组件21时所需要施加的力小于不需要使用扬声组件21所需要施加的力，从而能够在一定程度上方便用户使用眼镜的扬声组件21的功能。
具体地，请一并参阅图12和图14，在一个应用场景中，在第三支撑面341从与第一支撑面322弹性抵接向与第二支撑面323弹性抵接切换时，连接处324初始接触于第三支撑面341的第一位置3411，在第三支撑面341从与第二支撑面323弹性抵接向与第一支撑面322弹性抵接切换时，连接处324初始接触于第三支撑面341的第二位置3412。在一些实施例中，在垂直于转轴33的中轴线的截面上，第一位置3411与弹性件35和支撑件34的接触点沿弹性件35的弹性偏置方向上的距离d1小于第二位置3412与接触点沿弹性偏置方向上的距离d2。
需要指出的是，第三支撑面341与第一支撑面322弹性抵时，连接处324位于靠近第三支撑面341的一端的位置，而在第三支撑面341与第二支撑面323弹性抵接时，连接处324位于靠近第三支撑面341的另一端的位置。因此，上述的第一位置3411与第二位置3412分别位于靠近第三支撑面341的两端处。也就是说，本实施方式中，支撑件34的第三支撑面341的靠近两端的位置与弹性件35和支撑件34的接触点在弹性件35的弹性偏置方向上的距离不同，且第二位置3412对应的距离小于第一位置3411对应的距离。此时，在第三支撑面341从与第一支撑面322弹性抵接向与第二支撑面323弹性抵接切换时，连接处324初始并未立即抵接第三支撑面341而受到弹性件35的反作用力，而是在切换的过程中逐渐抵接第三支撑面341而受到弹性件35的反作用力；而在第三支撑面341从与第一支撑面322弹性抵接向与第二支撑面323弹性抵接切换时，连接处324初始便抵接第三支撑面341而受到弹性件35的反作用力，或者至少相对于第三支撑面341从与第二支 撑面323弹性抵接向与第一支撑面322弹性抵接的切换要早受到弹性件35的反作用力。因此，这种情况下，铰链30在由与第一支撑面322弹性抵接向与第二支撑面323弹性抵接切换时所需要的作用力较小，从而使得用户在使用扬声组件21时所扳动扬声组件21所需要施加的力较小，从而方便用户使用。
进一步地，第三支撑面341包括第一子支撑面3413和第二子支撑面3414，在一些实施例中，第一位置3411设置于第一子支撑面3413，第二位置3412设置于第二子支撑面3414。即第一子支撑面3413和第二子支撑面3414分别设置于靠近第三支撑面341的两端的位置。
在一些实施例中，第二子支撑面3414可以为平面，具体地，在第一支撑面322或第二支撑面323与第三支撑面341弹性抵接时，第二子支撑面3414可与第一支撑面322或第二支撑面323平行。而第一子支撑面3413可以为平面，也可以为弧面，此处不做限定。
进一步地，第一子支撑面3413与第二子支撑面3414不位于同一平面上，第一子支撑面3413相对于第二子支撑面3414倾斜设置，且二者之间的夹角可不大于10°，例如可以为不大于2°、4°、6°、8°、10°等。具体地，第一子支撑面3413朝向远离铰链臂32的方向设置，从而使得在垂直于转轴33的中轴线的截面上，第一位置3411与弹性件35和支撑件34的接触点沿弹性件35的弹性偏置方向上的距离小于第二位置3412与接触点沿弹性偏置方向上的距离。在一些实施例中，在第一子支撑面3413为弧面而第二子支撑面3414为平面时，第一子支撑面3413与第二子支撑面3414之间的夹角为在二者的相交处与第一子支撑面3413相切的平面与第二子支撑面3414之间的夹角。
请进一步参阅图15，图15是本申请铰链一实施方式的爆炸结构图。本实施方式中，铰链座31包括座本体313以及从座本体313凸出且彼此间隔设置的第一凸耳314和第二凸耳315，铰链臂32包括臂本体325以及从臂本体325凸出设置的第三凸耳326，第三凸耳326插入至第一凸耳314和第二凸耳315之间的间隔区域，并通过转轴33与第一凸耳314和第二凸耳315转动连接，第一支撑面322和第二支撑面323设置于第三凸耳326上，支撑件34至少部分设置于间隔区域内且位于第三凸耳326朝向座本体313的一侧，座本体313上设置有与间隔区域连通的容置腔3121，弹性件35设置于容置腔3121内，并将支撑件34朝向第三凸耳326进行弹性偏置。
具体地，第一凸耳314、第二凸耳315和第三凸耳326的对应位置处可分别设置有位于同一轴向上的第一通孔、第二通孔和第三通孔，三个通孔的内径均可不小于转轴33的外径，从而在转轴33穿设于对应的通孔中时，第一凸耳314和第二凸耳315所在的铰链座31能够与第三凸耳326所在的铰链臂32转动连接在一起。
在一些实施例中，第一支撑面322和第二支撑面323均设置于第三凸耳326上，且平行于转轴33的中轴线，从而使得在铰链臂32绕转轴33相对于铰链座31转动时，使得第一支撑面322和第二支撑面323均可能进入第一凸耳314和第二凸耳315之间的间隔区域。
进一步地，支撑件34位于座本体313的第一凸耳314和第二凸耳315之间，且支撑件34的第三支撑面341朝向第三凸耳326设置。在一个应用场景中，弹性件35完全设置于容置腔3121 内，并在朝向第一凸耳314和第二凸耳315之间的间隔区域的一侧与支撑件34接触。在弹性件35处于自然状态时，支撑件34靠近弹性件35的区域至少部分位于容置腔3121内。需要指出的是，支撑件34位于容置腔3121内的部分的形状与容置腔3121匹配，从而使得在弹性件35将支撑件34进行弹性偏置时，支撑件34位于容置腔3121的部分能够在容置腔3121内稳定滑动。
在一个应用场景中，在垂直于铰链座31的长度方向的截面上，容置腔3121的截面面积小于第一凸耳314和第二凸耳315之间的间隔区域的截面面积，支撑件34位于容置腔3121外的区域的形状与间隔区域匹配，从而使得支撑件34在朝向弹性件35一侧移动时，不至于全部进入容置腔3121内。
当然，在其它实施方式中，在垂直于铰链座31的长度方向的截面上，容置腔3121的截面形状也可以与第一凸耳314和第二凸耳315之间的间隔区域相同，此时，支撑件34可完全容置于容置腔3121内，从而使得在支撑件34收到推动作用时，在整个容置腔3121内滑动。
进一步地，在上述实施方式中的铰链30应用于本申请铰链组件实施方式中的铰链组件122时，铰链座31的第一端面312为第一凸耳314和第二凸耳315的朝向铰链臂32的端面，由臂本体325朝向凸出设置的第三凸耳326位于第一凸耳314和第二凸耳315之间的间隔区域内，从而使得第一凸耳314和第二凸耳315的第一端面312朝向臂本体325设置。在转轴33的中轴线方向的截面上，臂本体325进一步凸出于第三凸耳326从而形成朝向铰链座31的第一凸耳314和第二凸耳315的第二端面321。
本实施方式中，在铰链臂32与铰链座31进行相对转动的过程中，第一凸耳314和第二凸耳315的第一端面312与臂本体325的第二端面321之间的间隙始终大于或小于连接线60的直径，从而使得连接线60不至于在铰链座31与铰链臂32的相对转动过程中夹入第一凸耳314和第二凸耳315与臂本体325之间，进而减少铰链30对连接线60的损伤。
在一个应用场景中，在第一凸耳314和第二凸耳315的第二端面321与臂本体325的第一端面312之间的间隙在铰链臂32与铰链座31进行相对转动过程中始终保持为远大于或远小于连接线60的直径，从而进一步减少铰链30对连接线60的损伤。
需要指出的是，本实施方中，第一端面312与第二端面321之间的间隙可以为尺寸相同的均匀的间隙，从而均满足上述大于或者小于连接线60直径的条件；或者在另一实施方式中，可以仅是两端面靠近连接线60的位置处的间隙满足大于或者小于连接线60的直径，而两端面的其它位置处的间隙可以无需满足上述条件。
具体地，在一个应用场景中，在垂直于转轴33的中轴线的截面上，第一凸耳314和第二凸耳315朝向铰链臂32的端面和臂本体325朝向铰链座31的端面中的至少一者可采用倒角设置，以使得在铰链臂32与铰链座31进行相对转动过程中二者之间的间隙靠近连接线60的位置始终保持为大于连接线60的直径。
在一些实施例中，倒角设置既可以是倒圆角，或者也可以是直接切角。
本应用场景中，仅需要将靠近连接线60位置处的第一凸耳314和第二凸耳315朝向铰链 臂32的端面和臂本体325朝向铰链座31的端面中的至少一者进行倒角设置而使得在铰链臂32与铰链座31进行相对转动过程中不会将连接线60夹入两端面之间的间隙中。
本申请中上述铰链实施方式中的铰链可应用于本申请铰链组件实施方式中，但是并不做限定，在其它实施方式中还可以应用于其它的铰链组件当中，或者两个需转动连接的构件直接连接。
需要注意的是，以上对眼镜的铰链组件的描述仅仅是具体的示例，不应被视为是唯一可行的实施方案。显然，对于本领域的专业人员来说，在了解眼镜的铰链组件的基本原理后，可能在不背离这一原理的情况下，对实施眼镜的铰链组件的具体方式与步骤进行形式和细节上的各种修正和改变，但是这些修正和改变仍在以上描述的范围之内。例如，铰链座31和铰链腔41的截面形状可以为圆形、椭圆形、梯形等。诸如此类的变形，均在本申请的保护范围之内。
图16是本申请一些实施例提供的扬声组件的应用场景及结构示意图。请参照图16和图1，图16中所示的机构示意图相当于图1中扬声组件21。下面仅以骨传导扬声组件作为示例对扬声组件装置的应用场景及结构进行阐述，需要知道的是，气传导扬声组件也可以替代骨传导扬声组件，并实现类似骨传导扬声组件的功能。在一些实施例中，如图16所示，骨传导扬声组件可以包括耳机芯101、传动组件102、面板103(面板103也可以称为外壳面板，为机芯壳体上面向人体一侧的面板)、以及外壳104等。在一些实施例中，外壳104可以包括外壳背面和外壳侧面。耳机芯101可以通过传动组件102将振动信号传送至面板103和/或外壳104，从而通过与面板103或外壳104与人体皮肤的接触，将声音传送至人体。在一些实施例中，骨传导扬声组件的面板103和/或外壳104可以在耳屏处与人体皮肤接触，从而将声音传递至人体。在一些实施例中，面板103和/或外壳104也可以在耳廓后侧与人体皮肤接触。
在一些实施例中，耳机芯101产生的驱动力所在直线B(或者说驱动装置的振动方向)，与面板103的法线A具有一个夹角θ。或者说，直线B与直线A不平行。
面板上具有与使用者身体，如人体皮肤，接触或抵靠的区域。应当理解为，当面板上覆盖有其他材料(如硅胶等软性材料)以增强用户佩戴舒适感时，面板与使用者身体的关系则不为直接接触，而是相互抵靠。在一些实施例中，当骨传导扬声组件佩戴在使用者身体上后，面板的全部区域与使用者身体接触或抵靠。在一些实施例中，当骨传导扬声组件佩戴在使用者身体上后，面板的部分区域与使用者身体接触或抵靠。在一些实施例中，面板上用于与使用者身体接触或抵靠的区域可以占整个面板面积的50％以上，更优选的，可以占面板面积的60％以上。一般来说，面板上与使用者身体接触或抵靠的区域可以是平面或者曲面。
在一些实施例中，当面板上用于与使用者身体接触或抵靠的区域为平面时，其法线满足法线的一般定义，即为垂直于该平面的虚线。在一些实施例中，当面板上用于与使用者身体接触或抵靠的区域为曲面时，其法线为该区域的平均法线。其中，平均法线的定义如下：
Figure PCTCN2019102395-appb-000001
其中，
Figure PCTCN2019102395-appb-000002
为平均法线；
Figure PCTCN2019102395-appb-000003
为曲面上任意一点的法线，ds为面元。
更进一步地，所述曲面为接近平面的准平面，即所述曲面上至少50％区域内任意一点的法线与其平均法线的夹角小于设定阈值的面。在一些实施例中，所述设定阈值小于10°。在一些实施例中，所述设定阈值可以进一步小于5°。
在一些实施例中，所述驱动力所在直线B与面板103上用于与使用者身体接触或抵靠的区域的法线A’具有所述夹角θ。所述夹角θ的数值范围可以为0＜θ＜180°，进一步其数值范围可以为0＜θ＜180°且不等于90°。在一些实施例中，设定直线B具有指向骨传导扬声组件外的正方向，设定面板103的法线A(或者面板103与人体皮肤接触面的法线A’)也具有指向骨传导扬声组件外的正方向，则法线A或A’与直线B在其正方向上形成的夹角θ为锐角，即0＜θ＜90°。关于法线A与法线A’的更多描述，可以在图18及其相关描述中找到，在此不做赘述。
图17是本申请一些实施例提供的一种夹角方向的示意图。如图17所示，在一些实施例中，驱动装置产生的驱动力在XOY平面坐标系的第一象限和/或第三象限内具有分量。其中，XOY平面坐标系为一个参考坐标系，其原点O位于骨传导扬声组件佩戴在人体上后，面板和/或外壳与人体的接触面上，X轴与人体冠状轴平行，Y轴与人体矢状轴平行，且X轴正方向朝向人体外侧，Y轴正方向朝向人体前方。象限应当被理解为平面直角坐标系中的横轴(如X轴)和纵轴(如Y轴)所划分的四个区域，每一个区域叫做一个象限。象限以原点为中心，X、Y轴为分界线。右上的(X轴的正半轴与Y轴的正半轴围成的区域)称为第一象限，左上的(X轴的负半轴与Y轴的正半轴围成的区域)称为第二象限，左下的(X轴的负半轴与Y轴的负半轴围成的区域)称为第三象限，右下的(X轴的正半轴与Y轴的负半轴围成的区域)称为第四象限。其中，坐标轴上的点不属于任何象限。应当理解为，本实施例所述驱动力可以直接位于所述XOY平面坐标系的第一象限和/或第三象限中，或者所述驱动力朝向其他方向，但是在所述XOY平面坐标系的第一象限和/或第三象限中的投影或分量不为0，以及在Z轴方向的投影或分量可以为0或不为0。其中，Z轴垂直于所述XOY平面，且经过所述原点O。在一些具体实施例中，驱动力所在直线与面板上与使用者身体接触或抵靠的区域的法线之间的最小夹角θ可以为任意锐角，例如夹角θ的范围优选为5°～80°；更优选为15°～70°；再优选为25°～60°；再优选为25°～50°；再优选为28°～50°；再优选为30°～39°；再优选为31°～38°；更优选为32°～37°；更优先选为33°～36°；更优先选为33°～35.8°；更优先选为33.5°～35°。具体的，夹角θ可以是26°、27°、28°、29°、30°、31°、32°、33°、34°、34.2°、35°、35.8°、36°、37°或38°等，误差控制在0.2度以内。需要说明的是，上述对驱动力方向的说明不应理解为本申请中驱动力的限制，在其他实施例中，所述驱动力还可以在XOY平面坐标系中的第二、四象限具有分量，甚至所述驱动力还可以位于Y轴上等等。
图18是本申请一些实施例提供的骨传导扬声组件作用于人体皮肤、骨骼的结构示意图。
在一些实施例中，驱动力所在的直线与驱动装置振动所在的直线共线或平行。例如，在动圈原理的驱动装置中，驱动力的方向可以与线圈和/或磁路组件的振动方向相同或相反。面板可以为平面，也可以为曲面，或者面板上具有若干凸起或凹槽。在一些实施例中，当骨传导扬声组件佩戴在使用者身体上后，面板上与使用者身体接触或抵靠的区域的法线与所述驱动力所在的直线不平行。 一般来说，面板上与使用者身体接触或抵靠的区域较为平坦，具体可以是平面，或者曲度变化不大的准平面。当面板上用于与使用者身体接触或抵靠的区域为平面时，其上任意一点的法线均可以作为所述区域的法线，此时，上述面板103的法线A与面板103与人体皮肤接触面的法线A’可以为平行或重合。当面板上用于与使用者身体接触面板为非平面时，所述区域的法线可以为其平均法线。关于平均法线的详细定义可以参见图16中的相关描述，在此不再赘述。在其他一些实施例中，当面板上用于与使用者身体接触面板为非平面时，所述区域的法线还可以如下确定，选定面板与人体皮肤接触时的一个区域中的某一点，确定面板在该点处的切平面，再确定过该点且与所述切平面垂直的直线，将该直线作为所述面板的所述法线。当面板上用于与人体皮肤接触面板为非平面时，所选的点不同，面板在该点出的切平面不同，所确定的法线也会有所差异，此时的法线A’与面板的法线A是不平行的。根据本申请一个具体实施例，所述驱动力所在直线(或驱动装置振动所在直线)与所述区域的法线具有夹角θ，所述夹角0＜θ＜180°。在一些实施例中，当指定驱动力所在直线具有经面板(或者面板和/或外壳与人体皮肤接触面)指向骨传导扬声组件外的正方向，指定面板(或者面板和/或外壳与人体皮肤接触面)法线具有指向骨传导扬声组件外的正方向，这两条直线在正方向上形成的夹角为锐角。
如图18所示，所述骨传导扬声组件包括驱动装置(在其他实施例中也可称为换能装置)，传动组件1803，面板1801，以及外壳1802。在一些实施例中，线圈1804与磁路组件1807均为环状结构。在一些实施例中，驱动装置为动圈驱动方式，包括线圈1804及磁路组件1807。
在一些实施例中，线圈1804与磁路组件1807具有相互平行的轴线，线圈1804或磁路组件1807的轴线与线圈1804径向平面和/或磁路组件1807径向平面垂直。在一些实施例中，线圈1804与磁路组件1807具有相同的中心轴线，线圈1804的中心轴线与线圈1804径向平面垂直，且经过线圈1804的几何中心，磁路组件1807的中心轴线与磁路组件1807径向平面垂直，且经过磁路组件1807的几何中心。线圈1804或磁路组件1807的轴线与面板1801的法线具有前述夹角θ。
仅仅作为示例，下面结合图18，阐述驱动力F与皮肤变形S之间的关系。当驱动装置产生的驱动力所在直线与面板1801法线平行时(也就是夹角θ为零)，驱动力与皮肤总形变的关系为：
F ⊥＝S ⊥×E×A/h     (2)
其中，F ⊥为驱动力大小，S ⊥为皮肤在垂直皮肤方向的总形变，E为皮肤的弹性模量，A为面板与皮肤的接触面积，h为皮肤的总厚度(也即面板与骨骼之间的距离)。
当驱动装置的驱动力所在直线与面板上与使用者身体接触或抵靠的区域的法线垂直时(也就是夹角θ为90度)，垂直方向的驱动力与皮肤总形变的关系可以如公式(3)所示：
F //＝S //×G×A/h    (3)
其中，F //为驱动力大小，S //为皮肤在平行皮肤方向的总形变，G为皮肤的剪切模量，A为面板与皮肤的接触面积，h为皮肤的总厚度(也即面板与骨骼之间的距离)。
剪切模量G与弹性模量E之间的关系为：
G＝E/2(1+γ)     (4)
其中，γ为皮肤的泊松比0<γ<0.5，因而剪切模量G小于弹性模量E，对应在相同的驱动力下皮肤的总形变S //>S ⊥。通常，皮肤的泊松比接近0.4。
当驱动装置产生驱动力所在直线与面板与使用者身体接触的区域的法线不平行时，水平方向驱动力与垂直方向的驱动力分别表示为以下的公式(5)和公式(6)：
F ⊥＝F×cos(θ)    (5)
F //＝F×sin(θ)    (6)
其中，驱动力F与皮肤变形S之间的关系可由以下公式表示：
Figure PCTCN2019102395-appb-000004
当皮肤的泊松比为0.4时，夹角θ与皮肤总形变之间的关系的详细描述可以参考本申请的其它地方的具体内容。
图19是根据本申请一些实施例提供的骨传导扬声组件的夹角-相对位移关系图。如图19所示，夹角θ与皮肤总形变之间的关系为夹角θ越大，相对位移越大，则皮肤总形变S越大。皮肤在垂直皮肤方向形变S ⊥随着夹角θ的变大，相对位移变小，皮肤在垂直皮肤方向形变S ⊥变小；并且在夹角θ接近90度时，皮肤在垂直皮肤方向形变S ⊥逐渐趋向于0。
骨传导扬声组件在低频部分的音量与皮肤总变形S正相关。S越大，骨传导低频的音量越大。骨传导扬声组件在高频部分的音量与皮肤在垂直皮肤方向形变S ⊥正相关。S ⊥越大，骨传导低频的音量越大。
当皮肤的泊松比为0.4时，夹角θ与皮肤总形变S，皮肤在垂直皮肤方向形变S ⊥之间的关系的详细描述可以在图19中找到。如图19所示，夹角θ与皮肤总形变S之间的关系为夹角θ越大，皮肤总形变S越大，对应骨传导扬声组件的低频部分音量越大。如图19所示，夹角θ与皮肤在垂直皮肤方向形变S⊥之间的关系为夹角θ越大，皮肤在垂直皮肤方向形变S⊥越小，对应骨传导扬声组件的高频部分音量越小。
通过方程(7)以及图19的曲线可以看出，随着夹角θ的增大，皮肤总形变S增大的速度与皮肤在垂直皮肤方向形变S ⊥减小的速度不同。皮肤总形变S增大的速度先变快后变慢，皮肤在垂直皮肤方向形变S ⊥减小的速度越来越快。为平衡骨传导扬声组件低频与高频的音量，夹角θ要在一个合适的大小。例如θ的范围为5°～80°，或者为15°～70°，或者为25°～50°，或者为25°～35°，或者为25°～30°等等。
图20是根据本申请提供的不同夹角θ时骨传导扬声组件的频率响应曲线低频段部分的示意图。如图20所示，面板与皮肤接触，将振动传递到皮肤。在这个过程中，皮肤也会影响骨传导扬声组件的振动，从而影响到骨传导扬声组件的频率响应曲线。从上面的分析中，我们发现夹角度越大，相同的驱动力下皮肤的总形变越大，而对应骨传导扬声组件来说，相当于皮肤相对其面板部分的弹性减小。进一步地可以理解为，在驱动装置的驱动力所在直线与面板上与使用者身体接触或抵靠区域的法线形成一定夹角θ时，尤其是当夹角θ加大时，可以将频率响应曲线中的低频区域的谐 振峰调节至更低频的区域，使低频下潜更深，低频增多。相对于其他提高声音中低频成分的技术手段，如在骨传导扬声组件中增设传振片，设置所述夹角能够在提高低频能量的同时有效抑制振动感的增加，进而使振动感相对减少，使得骨传导扬声组件低频灵敏度显著提高，提高音质和人体的体验感。应当注意的是，在一些实施例中，低频增多，振动感少可以表现为夹角θ在(0，90°)范围内增大时，振动或声音信号中的低频范围的能量增加了，同时振动感也增加了，但是低频范围的能量增加的程度比振动感增加的程度更大，因此，在相对效果上，振动感相对减小了。从图20可以看出，夹角较大时，低频区的谐振峰出现在更低频段处，可以变相地延长频率曲率平坦的部分，从而提高扬声组件的音质。
需要注意的是，以上对骨传导扬声组件的描述仅仅是具体的示例，不应被视为是唯一可行的实施方案。显然，对于本领域的专业人员来说，在了解骨传导扬声组件的基本原理后，可能在不背离这一原理的情况下，对实施骨传导扬声组件的具体方式与步骤进行形式和细节上的各种修正和改变，但是这些修正和改变仍在以上描述的范围之内。例如，驱动力所在直线与面板上用于与使用者身体接触或抵靠的区域的法线之间的最小夹角θ可以为任意锐角，此处的锐角不局限于上述的5°～80°，夹角θ可以小于5°，例如1°、2°、3°、4°等。在另一些实施例中，夹角θ可以大于80°且小于90°，例如81°、82°、85°等。在一些实施例中，夹角θ的具体数值可以不为整数(例如81.3°、81.38°)。诸如此类的变形，均在本申请的保护范围之内。
图21是根据本申请的一些实施例所示的扬声组件的纵截面示意图。需要注意的是，图21中扬声组件200相当于图1和图16中扬声组件21，结合图16，其中耳机壳体220与外壳104相对应，耳机壳体220传振片214、连接件216与传动装置102相对应，磁路组件210与耳机芯101相对应。如图21所示，在一些实施例中，扬声组件200可以包括磁路组件210、线圈212、传振片214、连接件216以及耳机壳体220。磁路组件210可以包括第一磁性元件202、第一导磁元件204和第二导磁元件206。
在一些实施例中，耳机壳体220可以包括外壳面板222、外壳背面224和外壳侧面226。外壳背面224位于与外壳面板222相对的一面，并分别设置在外壳侧面226的两端面上。外壳面板222、外壳背面224和外壳侧面226形成具有一定容置空间的整体结构。在一些实施例中，磁路组件210、线圈212和传振片214固定在耳机壳体220内部。在一些实施例中，扬声组件200还可以包括外壳支架228，传振片214可以通过外壳支架228与耳机壳体220连接，线圈212可以固定在外壳支架228上，并通过外壳支架228带动外壳220振动。在一些实施例中，外壳支架228可以是耳机壳体220的一部分，也可以是单独的组件，直接或者间接连接于耳机壳体220的内部。在一些实施例中，外壳支架228可以固定在外壳侧面226的内表面上。在一些实施例中，外壳支架228可以通过胶水粘贴在耳机壳体220上，也可以通过冲压、注塑、卡接、铆接、螺纹连接或焊接固定在耳机壳体220上。
在一些实施例中，可以通过设计外壳面板222、外壳背面224和外壳侧面226的连接方式确保耳机壳体220具有较大的刚度。例如，外壳面板222、外壳背面224和外壳侧面226可以是一 体成型。又例如，外壳背面224和外壳侧面226可以是一体成型结构。外壳面板222和外壳侧面226可以通过胶水直接粘贴固定，或是通过卡接、焊接或螺纹连接的方式进行固定。所述胶水可以是粘性强、硬度较大的胶水。再例如，外壳面板222和外壳侧面226可以是一体成型结构，外壳背面224和外壳侧面226之间可以通过胶水直接粘贴固定，或是通过卡接、焊接或螺纹连接的方式进行固定。在一些实施例中，外壳面板222、外壳背面224和外壳侧面226都是独立的部件，三者之间可以通过胶水、卡接、焊接或螺纹连接方式中的一种或任意几种的组合进行固定连接。例如，外壳面板222和外壳侧面226之间通过胶水连接，外壳背面224和外壳侧面226之间通过卡接、焊接或螺纹连接进行连接。或是外壳背面224和外壳侧面226之间通过胶水连接，外壳面板222和外壳侧面226之间通过卡接、焊接或螺纹连接进行连接。
在不同的应用场景中，本申请中所描述的壳体可以通过不同的装配方式制成。例如，如本申请中其他地方的描述，壳体可以是一体成型的方式，也可以是分体组合的方式，或者两者相结合的方式。在分体组合的方式中，不同分体之间可以采用胶水粘贴固定，或是通过卡接、焊接或螺纹连接的方式进行固定。具体地，为了更好地理解本申请中耳机壳体的装配方式，图22-24描述了几种壳体的装配方式的示例。
如图22所示，扬声组件主要包括磁路组件2210和壳体。在一些实施例中，磁路组件2210可以包括第一磁性元件2202、第一导磁元件2204和第二导磁元件2206。壳体可以包括外壳面板2222，外壳背面2224和外壳侧面2226。外壳侧面2226和外壳背面2224由一体成型的方式制成，外壳面板2222通过分件组合的方式连接到外壳侧面2226的一端。所述分件组合的方式包括使用胶水粘结固定，或是通过卡接、焊接或螺纹连接的方式将外壳面板2222固定在外壳侧面2226的一端。外壳面板2222和外壳侧面2226(或者外壳背面2224)可以采用不同、相同或者部分相同的材料制成。在一些实施例中，外壳面板2222和外壳侧面2226采用相同的材料制成，且所述相同材料的杨氏模量大于2000MPa。更优选地，所述相同材料的杨氏模量大于4000MPa，更优选地，所述相同材料的杨氏模量大于6000MPa，更优选地，耳机壳体220材料的杨氏模量大于8000MPa，更优选地，所述相同材料的杨氏模量大于12000MPa，更优选地，所述相同材料的杨氏模量大于15000MPa，进一步优选地，所述相同材料的杨氏模量大于18000MPa。在一些实施例中，外壳面板2222和外壳侧面2226采用不同的材料制成，所述不同材料的杨氏模量都大于4000MPa。更优选地，所述不同材料的杨氏模量都大于6000MPa，更优选地，所述不同材料的杨氏模量都大于8000MPa，更优选地，所述不同材料的杨氏模量都大于12000MPa，更优选地，所述不同材料的杨氏模量都大于15000MPa，进一步优选地，所述不同材料的杨氏模量都大于18000MPa。在一些实施例中，外壳面板2222和/或外壳侧面2226的材料包括但不限于丙烯腈-丁二烯-苯乙烯共聚物(AcrYlonitrile butadiene stYrene,ABS)、聚苯乙烯(PolYstYrene,PS)、高冲击聚苯乙烯(High impact polYstYrene,HIPS)、聚丙烯(PolYpropYlene,PP)、聚对苯二甲酸乙二酯(PolYethYlene terephthalate,PET)、聚酯(PolYester,PES)、聚碳酸酯(PolYcarbonate,PC)、聚酰胺(PolYamides,PA)、聚氯乙烯(PolYvinYl chloride,PVC)、聚氨酯(PolYurethanes,PU)、聚二氯乙烯(PolYvinYlidene chloride)、聚乙烯(PolYethYlene, PE)、聚甲基丙烯酸甲酯(PolYmethYl methacrYlate,PMMA)、聚醚醚酮(PolYetheretherketone,PEEK)、酚醛树脂(Phenolics,PF)、尿素甲醛树脂(Urea-formaldehYde,UF)、三聚氰胺-甲醛树脂(Melamine formaldehYde,MF)以及一些金属、合金(如铝合金、铬钼钢、钪合金、镁合金、钛合金、镁锂合金、镍合金等)、玻璃纤维或碳纤维中的任意材料或上述任意材料的组合。在一些实施例中，外壳面板2222的材料为玻璃纤维、碳纤维与聚碳酸酯(PolYcarbonate,PC)、聚酰胺(PolYamides,PA)等材料的任意组合。在一些实施例中，外壳面板2222和/或外壳侧面2226的材料可以是碳纤维和聚碳酸酯(PolYcarbonate,PC)按照一定比例混合制成。在一些实施例中，外壳面板2222和/或外壳侧面2226的材料可以是碳纤维、玻璃纤维和聚碳酸酯(PolYcarbonate,PC)按照一定比例混合制成。在一些实施例中，外壳面板2222和/或外壳侧面2226的材料可以是玻璃纤维和聚碳酸酯(PolYcarbonate,PC)按照一定比例混合制成，也可以使玻璃纤维和聚酰胺(PolYamides,PA)按照一定比例混合制成。
在一些实施例中，外壳面板2222、外壳背面2224和外壳侧面2226形成具有一定容置空间的整体结构。在所述整体结构内，传振片2214通过连接件2216与磁路组件2210连接。磁路组件2210的两侧分别连接第一导磁元件2204和第二导磁元件2206。传振片2214通过外壳支架2228固定在所述整体结构的内部。在一些实施例中，外壳侧面2226上具有用于支撑外壳支架2228的台阶结构。在外壳支架2228固定于外壳侧面2226后，外壳面板2222可以同时固定在外壳支架2228和外壳侧面2226上，或者单独固定在外壳支架2228或外壳侧面2226上。在这种情况下，可选地，外壳侧面2226和外壳支架2228可以一体成型。在一些实施例中，外壳支架2228可以直接固定在外壳面板2222上(例如，通过胶水粘贴、卡接、焊接或螺纹连接等方式)。固定后的外壳面板2222和外壳支架2228再与外壳侧面固定(例如，通过胶水粘贴、卡接、焊接或螺纹连接等方式)。在这种情况下，可选地，外壳支架2228和外壳面板2222可以一体成型。
在另一具体的实施例中，如图23所示，扬声组件主要包括磁路组件2240和壳体。其中，磁路组件2240可以包括第一磁性元件2232、第一导磁元件2234和第二导磁元件2236。在整体结构内，传振片2244通过连接件2246与磁路组件2240连接。该实施例与图22提供的实施例不同之处在于，外壳支架2258和外壳侧面2256一体成型。外壳面板2252固定在外壳侧面2256上与外壳支架2258连接的一侧(例如，通过胶水粘贴、卡接、焊接或螺纹连接等方式)，外壳背面2254固定在外壳侧面2256的另一侧(例如，通过胶水粘贴、卡接、焊接或螺纹连接等方式)。在这种情况下，可选地，外壳支架2258和外壳侧面2256是分体组合的结构，并且外壳面板2252，外壳背面2254，外壳支架2258和外壳侧面2256之间都是通过胶水粘贴、卡接、焊接或螺纹连接的方式进行固定连接。
在另一具体的实施例中，如图24所示，该实施例中的扬声组件主要包括磁路组件2270和壳体。其中，磁路组件2270可以包括第一磁性元件2262、第一导磁元件2264和第二导磁元件2266。在整体结构内，传振片2274通过连接件2276与磁路组件2270连接。该实施例与图23提供的实施例的不同之处在于，外壳面板2282和外壳侧面2286一体成型。外壳背面2284固定在外壳侧面2286 上相对于外壳面板2282的一侧(例如，通过胶水粘贴、卡接、焊接或螺纹连接等方式)。外壳支架2288通过胶水粘贴、卡接、焊接或螺纹连接的方式固定在外壳面板2282和/或外壳侧面2286上。在这种情况下，可选地，外壳支架2288，外壳面板2282和外壳侧面2286是一体成型的结构。
图25是根据本申请一些实施例所示的一种扬声组件的壳体结构示意图。如图25所示，壳体700可以包括外壳面板710、外壳背面720和外壳侧面730。外壳面板710与人体接触，将扬声组件的振动传递给人体的听觉神经。在一些实施例中，当壳体700的整体刚度较大时，在一定的频率范围内，外壳面板710和外壳背面720的振动幅度和相位保持相同或基本相同(外壳侧面730不压缩空气因而不产生漏音)，使得外壳面板710产生的第一漏音信号和外壳背面720产生的第二漏音信号能够相互叠加。所述叠加可以减小第一漏音声波或第二漏音声波的幅值，从而达到降低壳体700漏音的目的。在一些实施例中，所述的一定频率范围至少包括频率大于500Hz的部分。优选地，所述的一定频率范围至少包括频率大于600Hz的部分。优选地，所述的一定频率范围至少包括频率大于800Hz的部分。优选地，所述的一定频率范围至少包括频率大于1000Hz的部分。优选地，所述的一定频率范围至少包括频率大于2000Hz的部分。更优选地，所述的一定频率范围至少包括频率大于5000Hz的部分。更优选地，所述的一定频率范围至少包括频率大于8000Hz的部分。进一步优选地，所述的一定频率范围至少包括频率大于10000Hz的部分。
在一些实施例中，扬声组件的壳体的刚度会影响壳体上不同部位(例如，外壳面板、外壳背面和/或外壳侧面)的振动幅度和相位，从而影响扬声组件的漏音。在一些实施例中，当扬声组件的壳体具有比较大的刚度时，外壳面板和外壳背面能够在较高的频率下保持相同或者基本相同的振动幅度和相位，从而显著减小扬声组件的漏音。
在一些实施例中，较高的频率可以包括不小于1000Hz的频率，例如，1000Hz-2000Hz之间的频率，1100Hz-2000Hz之间的频率，1300Hz-2000Hz之间的频率，1500Hz-2000Hz之间的频率，1700Hz-2000Hz之间的频率，1900Hz-2000Hz之间的频率。优选地，这里所说的较高的频率可以包括不小于2000Hz的频率，例如，2000Hz-3000Hz之间的频率，2100Hz-3000Hz之间的频率，2300Hz-3000Hz之间的频率，2500Hz-3000Hz之间的频率，2700Hz-3000Hz之间的频率，或者2900Hz-3000Hz之间的频率。优选地，较高的频率可以包括不小于4000Hz的频率，例如，4000Hz-5000Hz之间的频率，4100Hz-5000Hz之间的频率，4300Hz-5000Hz之间的频率，4500Hz-5000Hz之间的频率，4700Hz-5000Hz之间的频率，或者4900Hz-5000Hz之间的频率。更优选地，较高的频率可以包括不小于6000Hz的频率，例如，6000Hz-8000Hz之间的频率，6100Hz-8000Hz之间的频率，6300Hz-8000Hz之间的频率，6500Hz-8000Hz之间的频率，7000Hz-8000Hz之间的频率，7500Hz-8000Hz之间的频率，或者7900Hz-8000Hz之间的频率。进一步优选地，较高的频率可以包括不小于8000Hz的频率，例如，8000Hz-12000Hz之间的频率，8100Hz-12000Hz之间的频率，8300Hz-12000Hz之间的频率，8500Hz-12000Hz之间的频率，9000Hz-12000Hz之间的频率，10000Hz-12000Hz之间的频率，或者11000Hz-12000Hz之间的频率。
外壳面板和外壳背面保持相同或者基本相同的振动幅度是指所述外壳面板和外壳背面的 振动幅度的比值在一定的范围之内。例如，外壳面板和外壳背面的振动幅度的比值在0.3到3之间，优选地，外壳面板和外壳背面的振动幅度的比值在0.4到2.5之间，优选地，外壳面板和外壳背面的振动幅度的比值在0.5到1.5之间，更优选地，外壳面板和外壳背面的振动幅度的比值在0.6到1.4之间，更优选地，外壳面板和外壳背面的振动幅度的比值在0.7到1.2之间，更优选地，外壳面板和外壳背面的振动幅度的比值在0.75到1.15之间，更优选地，外壳面板和外壳背面的振动幅度的比值在0.8到1.1之间，更优选地，外壳面板和外壳背面的振动幅度的比值在0.85到1.1之间，进一步优选地，外壳面板和外壳背面的振动幅度的比值在0.9到1.05之间。在一些实施例中，外壳面板和外壳背面的振动可以用其他能够表征其振动幅度的物理量来表示。例如，可以分别用空间中一点处由外壳面板和外壳背面产生的声压来表征外壳面板和外壳背面的振动幅度。
外壳面板和外壳背面保持相同或者基本相同的振动相位是指所述外壳面板和外壳背面的振动相位的差值在一定的范围之内。例如，外壳面板和外壳背面的振动相位的差值在-90°到90°之间，优选地，外壳面板和外壳背面的振动相位的差值在-80°到80°之间，优选地，外壳面板和外壳背面的振动相位的差值在-60°到60°之间，优选地，外壳面板和外壳背面的振动相位的差值在-45°到45°之间，更优选地，外壳面板和外壳背面的振动相位的差值在-30°到30°之间，更优选地，外壳面板和外壳背面的振动相位的差值在-20°到20°之间，更优选地，外壳面板和外壳背面的振动相位的差值在-15°到15°之间，更优选地，外壳面板和外壳背面的振动相位的差值在-12°到12°之间，更优选地，外壳面板和外壳背面的振动相位的差值在-10°到10°之间，更优选地，外壳面板和外壳背面的振动相位的差值在-8°到8°之间，更优选地，外壳面板和外壳背面的振动相位的差值在-6°到6°之间，更优选地，外壳面板和外壳背面的振动相位的差值在-5°到5°之间，更优选地，外壳面板和外壳背面的振动相位的差值在-4°到4°之间，更优选地，外壳面板和外壳背面的振动相位的差值在-3°到3°之间，更优选地，外壳面板和外壳背面的振动相位的差值在-2°到2°之间，更优选地，外壳面板和外壳背面的振动相位的差值在-1°到1°之间，进一步优选地，外壳面板和外壳背面的振动相位的差值为0°。
需要注意的是，以上对扬声组件的描述仅仅是具体的示例，不应被视为是唯一可行的实施方案。显然，对于本领域的专业人员来说，在了解扬声组件的基本原理后，可能在不背离这一原理的情况下，对实施扬声组件的具体方式与步骤进行形式和细节上的各种修正和改变，但是这些修正和改变仍在以上描述的范围之内。例如，外壳侧面、外壳背面和外壳支架可以是一体成型结构。诸如此类的变形，均在本申请的保护范围之内。
图26是根据本申请的一些实施例所示的一种扬声组件的纵截面示意图。如图26所示，耳机芯100可以包括第一磁性元件102、第一导磁元件104、第二导磁元件106、第一振动板108、音圈110、第二振动板112以及振动面板114。其中，扬声组件中耳机芯的部分元件可以组成磁路组件。在一些实施例中，磁路组件可以包括第一磁性元件102、第一导磁元件104、第二导磁元件106。磁路组件可以产生第一全磁场(也可被称为“磁路组件的总磁场”或“第一磁场”)。
在本申请中描述的磁性元件是指可以产生磁场的元件，例如磁铁等。所述磁性元件可以具 有磁化方向，所述磁化方向是指在所述磁性元件内部的磁场方向。在一些实施例中，第一磁性元件102可以包括一个或多个磁铁，第一磁性元件可以产生第二磁场。在一些实施例中，所述磁铁可以包括金属合金磁铁，铁氧体等。其中，金属合金磁铁可以包括钕铁硼、钐钴、铝镍钴、铁铬钴、铝铁硼、铁碳铝，或类似的，或其中多种的组合。铁氧体可以包括钡铁氧体，钢铁氧体，美锰铁氧体，锂锰铁氧体，或类似的，或其中多种组合。
在一些实施例中，第一导磁元件104的下表面可以连接第一磁性元件102的上表面。第二导磁元件106可以连接第一磁性元件102。需要注意的是，这里所说的导磁体也可以称为磁场集中器或铁芯。导磁体可以调整磁场(例如，第一磁性元件102产生的第二磁场)的分布。所述导磁体可以包括由软磁材料加工而成的元件。在一些实施例中，所述软磁材料可以包括金属材料、金属合金、金属氧化物材料、非晶金属材料等，例如铁、铁硅系合金、铁铝系合金、镍铁系合金、铁钴系合金、低碳钢、硅钢片、矽钢片、铁氧体等。在一些实施例中，可以通过铸造、塑性加工、切削加工、粉末冶金等一种或多种组合的方法加工所述导磁体。铸造可以包括砂型铸造、熔模铸造、压力铸造、离心铸造等；塑性加工可以包括轧制、铸造、锻造、冲压、挤压、拔制等一种或多种组合；切削加工可以包括车削、铣削、刨削、磨削等。在一些实施例中，所述导磁体的加工方法可以包括3D打印、数控机床等。第一导磁元件104、第二导磁元件106与第一磁性元件102之间的连接方式可以包括粘接、卡接、焊接、铆接、螺栓连接等一种或多种组合。在一些实施例中，第一磁性元件102、第一导磁元件104和第二导磁元件106可以设置为轴对称结构。所述轴对称结构可以是环状结构、柱状结构或是其它具有轴对称结构。
在一些实施例中，第一磁性元件102与第二导磁元件106之间可以形成磁间隙。音圈110可以设置于所述磁间隙中。音圈110可以与第一振动板108连接。第一振动板108可以连接第二振动板112，第二振动板112可以连接振动面板114。当所述音圈110内通入电流后，所述音圈110位于在第一磁性元件102、第一导磁元件104和第二导磁元件106形成的磁场，会受到安培力作用，所述安培力驱动音圈110振动，音圈110的振动会带动第一振动板108、第二振动板112和振动面板114的振动。振动面板114将所述振动通过组织与骨骼传递到听觉神经，从而使人听到声音。所述振动面板114可以直接与人体皮肤接触，或可以通过由特定材料组成的振动传递层与皮肤接触。
在一些实施例中，对于具有单一磁性元件的扬声组件，通过音圈处的磁感线并不均匀，呈发散状。同时磁路中可能会形成漏磁，即较多的磁感线泄漏至磁间隙以外，未能穿过音圈，从而使得音圈位置处的磁感应强度(或磁场强度)下降，影响扬声组件的灵敏度。因此，耳机芯100可以进一步包括至少一个第二磁性元件和/至少一个第三导磁元件(图中未示)。所述至少一个第二磁性元件和/至少一个第三导磁元件可以抑制磁感线的泄露，约束穿过音圈的磁感线形态，使得较多的磁感线尽量水平密集地穿过音圈，增强音圈位置处的磁感应强度(或磁场强度)，从而提高耳机芯100的灵敏度，进而提高耳机芯100的机械转化效率(即，将输入耳机芯100的电能转化为音圈振动的机械能的效率)。
图27是根据本申请的一些实施例所示的一种磁路组件2100的纵截面示意图。如图27所 示，磁路组件2100可以包括第一磁性元件2102、第一导磁元件2104、第二导磁元件2106以及第二磁性元件2108。在一些实施例中，第一磁性元件2102和/或第二磁性元件2108可以包括本申请中描述的任意一种或几种磁铁。在一些实施例中，第一磁性元件2102可以包括第一磁铁，第二磁性元件2108可以包括第二磁铁，所述第一磁铁与所述第二磁铁可以相同或不同。第一导磁元件2104和/或第二导磁元件2106可以包括本申请中描述的任意一种或几种导磁材料。第一导磁元件2104和/或第二导磁元件2106的加工方法可以包括本申请中描述的任意一种或几种加工方式。在一些实施例中，第一磁性元件2102和/或第一导磁元件2104可以设置为轴对称结构。例如，第一磁性元件2102和/或第一导磁元件2104可以是圆柱体，长方体，或者中空的环状(例如，横截面为跑道的形状)。在一些实施例中，第一磁性元件2102和第一导磁元件2104可以是共轴的圆柱体，含有相同或者不同的直径。在一些实施例中，第二导磁元件2106可以是凹槽型结构。所述凹槽型结构可以包含U型的剖面(如图26所示)。所述凹槽型的第二导磁元件2106可以包括底板和侧壁。在一些实施例中，所述底板和所述侧壁可以是一体成型的，例如，所述侧壁可以由底板在垂直于底板的方向进行延伸形成。在一些实施例中，所述底板可以通过本申请中描述的任意一种或几种连接方式连接所述侧壁。第二磁性元件2108可以设定为环状或片状。在一些实施例中，第二磁性元件2108可以是环状的。第二磁性元件2108可以包括内环以及外环。在一些实施例中，所述内环和/或外环的形状可以是圆形、椭圆、三角形、四边形或其它任意多边形在一些实施例中，第二磁性元件2108可以由多个磁体排列组成。所述多个磁体的任意一个磁体的两端可以与相邻的磁体的两端连接或存在一定的间距。多个磁体之间的间距可以相同或不同。在一些实施例中，所述第二磁性元件2108可以由2个或3个片状的磁体等距排列构成。所述片状的磁体的形状可以是扇形、四边形等。在一些实施例中，第二磁性元件2108可以与第一磁性元件2102和/或第一导磁元件2104共轴。
在一些实施例中，第一磁性元件2102的上表面可以连接第一导磁元件2104的下表面。第一磁性元件2102的下表面可以连接第二导磁元件206的底板。第二磁性元件2108的下表面连接第二导磁元件2106的侧壁。第一磁性元件2102、第一导磁元件2104、第二导磁元件2106和/或第二磁性元件2108之间的连接方式可以包括粘接、卡接、焊接、铆接、螺栓连接等一种或多种组合。
在一些实施例中，第一磁性元件2102和/或第一导磁元件2104与第二磁性元件2108的内环之间形成磁间隙。音圈2128可以设置于所述磁间隙中。在一些实施例中，所述第二磁性元件2108与所述音圈2128相对于第二导磁元件2106的底板的高度相等。在一些实施例中，第一磁性元件2102、第一导磁元件2104、第二导磁元件2106以及第二磁性元件2108可以形成磁回路。在一些实施例中，磁路组件2100可以产生第一全磁场(也可被称为“磁路组件的总磁场”或“第一磁场”)，第一磁性元件2102可以产生第二磁场。所述第一全磁场由所述磁路组件2100中的所有组分(例如，第一磁性元件2102，第一导磁元件2104、第二导磁元件2106以及第二磁性元件2108)产生的磁场共同形成。所述第一全磁场在所述磁间隙内的磁场强度(也可以被称为磁感应强度或者磁通量密度)大于所述第二磁场在所述磁间隙内的磁场强度。在一些实施例中，第二磁性元件2108可以产生第三磁场，所述第三磁场可以提高所述第一全磁场在所述磁间隙处的磁场强度。这里所说的第三磁场提 高第一全磁场的磁场强度指的是，在有第三磁场存在(即，存在第二磁性元件2108)时第一全磁场在所述磁间隙的磁场强度大于没有第三磁场存在(即，不存在第二磁性元件2108)时第一全磁场的。在本说明书中的其他实施例中，除非特别说明，磁路组件表示包含所有磁性元件和导磁元件的结构，第一全磁场表示由磁路组件整体产生的磁场，第二磁场、第三磁场、……、第N磁场分别表示由相应的磁性元件所产生的磁场。在不同的实施例中，产生所述第二磁场(或者第三磁场、……、第N磁场)的磁性元件可以是相同的，也可以不同。
在一些实施例中，第一磁性元件2102的磁化方向与第二磁性元件2108的磁化方向之间的夹角在0度与180度之间。在一些实施例中，第一磁性元件2102的磁化方向与第二磁性元件2108的磁化方向与之间的夹角在45度与135度之间。在一些实施例中，第一磁性元件2102的磁化方向与第二磁性元件2108的磁化方向之间的夹角等于或大于90度。在一些实施例中，第一磁性元件2102的磁化方向垂直于第一磁性元件202的下表面或上表面竖直向上(如图中a所示方向)，第二磁性元件2108的磁化方向由第二磁性元件2108的内环指向外环(如图中b所方向示，在第一磁性元件2102的右侧，第一磁性元件2102的磁化方向沿着顺时针方向偏转90度)。
在一些实施例中，在第二磁性元件2108的位置，所述第一全磁场的方向与第二磁性元件2108的磁化方向之间的夹角不高于90度。在一些实施例中，在第二磁性元件2108的位置处，第一磁性元件2102产生的磁场的方向与第二磁性元件2108的磁化方向之间的夹角可以是0度、10度、20度等小于或等于90度的夹角。
与单一磁性元件的磁路组件相比，第二磁性元件2108可以提高磁路组件2100中磁间隙内总磁通量，进而增加磁间隙中的磁感应强度。并且，在第二磁性元件2108的作用下，原本发散的磁感线会向磁间隙所在位置收敛，进一步增加磁间隙中的磁感应强度。
图28是根据本申请的一些实施例所示的磁路组件2600的纵截面示意图。如图28所示，磁路组件2600与磁路组件2100的不同之处在于，其可以进一步包括至少一个导电元件(例如，第一导电元件2118、第二导电元件2120以及第三导电元件2122)。
所述导电元件可以包括金属材料、金属合金材料、无机非金属材料或其它导电材料。金属材料可以包括金、银、铜、铝等；金属合金材料可以包括铁基合金、铝基合金材料、铜基合金、锌基合金等；无机非金属材料可以包括石墨等。所述导电元件可以是片状、环状、网状等。第一导电元件2118可以设置于第一导磁元件2104的上表面。第二导电元件2120可以连接第一磁性元件2102以及第二导磁元件2106。第三导电元件2122可以连接第一磁性元件2102的侧壁。在一些实施例中，第一导磁元件2104可以凸出于第一磁性元件2102形成第一凹部，第三导电元件2122设置于所述第一凹部。在一些实施例中，第一导电元件2118、第二导电元件2120以及第三导电元件2122可以包括相同或不同的导电材料。第一导电元件2118、第二导电元件2120以及第三导电元件2122可以通过本申请中描述的任意一种或多种连接方式分别连接第一导磁元件2104、第二导磁元件2106和/或第一磁性元件2102。
第一磁性元件2102、第一导磁元件2104与第二磁性元件2108的内环之间形成磁间隙。音 圈2128可以设置于所述磁间隙中。第一磁性元件2102、第一导磁元件2104、第二导磁元件2106以及第二磁性元件2108可以形成磁回路。在一些实施例中，所述导电元件可以降低音圈2128的感抗。例如，若音圈2128通入第一交变电流时，音圈2128附近会产生第一交变感应磁场。第一交变感应磁场在所述磁回路中磁场的作用下，会使音圈2128产生感抗，阻碍音圈2128的运动。当在音圈2128附近设置导电元件(例如，第一导电元件2118、第二导电元件2120以及第三导电元件2122)，在所述第一交变感应磁场作用下，所述导电元件可以感生出第二交变电流。所述导电元件内的第三交变电流可以在其附近产生第二交变感应磁场，所述第二交变感应磁场与所述第一交变感应磁场方向相反，可以减弱所述第一交变感应磁场，从而减小音圈2128的感抗，增大音圈中的电流，提高扬声组件的灵敏度。
图29是根据本申请的一些实施例所示的一种磁路组件2700的纵截面示意图。如图29所示，磁路组件2700与磁路组件2500的不同之处在于，磁路组件2700可以进一步包括第三磁性元件2110、第四形磁性元件2112、第五磁性元件2114、第三导磁元件2116、第六磁性元件2124以及第七磁性元件2126。第三磁性元件2110、第四磁性元件2112、第五磁性元件2114、第三导磁元件2116和/或第六磁性元件2124以及第七磁性元件2126可以设置为共轴的环形柱体。
在一些实施例中，第二磁性元件2108的上表面连接第七磁性元件2126，第二磁性元件2108的下表面可以连接第三磁性元件2110。第三磁性元件2110可以连接第二导磁元件2106。第七磁性元件2126的上表面可以连接第三导磁元件2116。第四磁性元件2112可以连接第二导磁元件2106以及第一磁性元件2102。第六磁性元件2124可以连接第五磁性元件2114、第三导磁元件2116以及第七磁性元件2126。在一些实施例中，第一磁性元件2102、第一导磁元件2104、第二导磁元件2106、第二磁性元件2108、第三磁性元件2110、第四磁性元件2112、第五磁性元件2114、第三导磁元件2116、第六磁性元件2124以及第七磁性元件2126可以形成磁回路以及磁间隙。
在一些实施例中，第一磁性元件2102的磁化方向与第六磁性元件2124的磁化方向之间的夹角可以在0度与180度之间。在一些实施例中，第一磁性元件2102的磁化方向与第六磁性元件2124的磁化方向与之间的夹角在45度与135度之间。在一些实施例中，第一磁性元件2102的磁化方向与第六磁性元件2124的磁化方向之间的夹角不高于90度。在一些实施例中，第一磁性元件2102的磁化方向垂直于第一磁性元件2102的下表面或上表面竖直向上(如图a方向所示)，第六磁性元件2124的磁化方向由第六磁性元件2124的外环指向内环(如图中g方向所示，在第一磁性元件2102的右侧，第一磁性元件2102的磁化方向沿着顺时针方向偏转270度)。在一些实施例中，在同一竖直方向上，第六磁性元件2124的磁化方向与第四磁性元件2112的磁化方向可以相同。
在一些实施例中，在第六磁性元件2124的位置处，磁路组件2700产生的磁场的方向与第六磁性元件2124的磁化方向之间的夹角不高于90度。在一些实施例中，在第六磁性元件2124的位置处，第一磁性元件2102产生的磁场的方向与第六磁性元件2124的磁化方向之间的夹角可以是0度、10度、20度等小于或等于90度的夹角。
在一些实施例中，所述第一磁性元件2102的磁化方向与第七磁性元件2126的磁化方向之 间的夹角可以在0度与180度之间。在一些实施例中，第一磁性元件2102的磁化方向与第七磁性元件2126的磁化方向与之间的夹角在45度与135度之间。在一些实施例中，所述第一磁性元件2102的磁化方向与第七磁性元件2126的磁化方向之间的夹角不高于90度。在一些实施例中，第一磁性元件2102的磁化方向垂直于第一磁性元件2102的下表面或上表面竖直向上(如图a方向所示)，第七磁性元件2126的磁化方向由第七磁性元件2126的下表面指向上表面(如图中f方向所示，在第一磁性元件2102的右侧，第一磁性元件2102的磁化方向沿着顺时针方向偏转360度)。在一些实施例中，第七磁性元件2126的磁化方向与第三磁性元件2110的磁化方向可以相反。
在一些实施例中，在第七磁性元件2126处，磁路组件2700产生的磁场的方向与所述第七磁性元件2126的磁化方向之间的夹角不高于90度。在一些实施例中，在第七磁性元件2126的位置处，第一磁性元件2102产生的磁场的方向与第七磁性元件2126的磁化方向之间的夹角可以是0度、10度、20度等小于或等于90度的夹角。
在磁路组件2700中，第三导磁元件2116可以将磁路组件2700产生的磁路封闭，使得较多的磁感线集中于所述磁间隙内，从而达到抑制漏磁、增加磁间隙处的磁感应强度、及提高扬声组件的灵敏度的功效。
图30是根据本申请的一些实施例所示的一种磁路组件2900的纵截面示意图。如图30所示，磁路组件2900可以包括第一磁性元件2902、第一导磁元件2904、第一全磁场改变元件2906以及第二磁性元件2908。
第一磁性元件2902的上表面可以连接第一导磁元件2904的下表面，第二磁性元件2908可以连接第一磁性元件2902以及第一全磁场改变元件2906。第一磁性元件2902、第一导磁元件2904、第一全磁场改变元件2906和/或第二磁性元件2908之间的连接方式可以基于本申请中描述的任意一种或几种连接方式。在一些实施例中，第一磁性元件2902、第一导磁元件2904、第一全磁场改变元件2906和/或第二磁性元件2908可形成磁回路及磁间隙。
在一些实施例中，磁路组件2900可以产生第一全磁场，第一磁性元件2902可以产生第二磁场，所述第一全磁场在所述磁间隙内的磁场强度大于所述第二磁场在所述磁间隙内的磁场强度。在一些实施例中，第二磁性元件2908可以产生第三磁场，所述第三磁场可以提高所述第二磁场在所述磁间隙处的磁场强度。
在一些实施例中，第一磁性元件2902的磁化方向与第二磁性元件2908的磁化方向之间的夹角可以在0度与180度之间。在一些实施例中，第一磁性元件2902的磁化方向与第二磁性元件2908的磁化方向与之间的夹角在45度与135度之间。在一些实施例中，第一磁性元件2902的磁化方向与第二磁性元件2908的磁化方向之间的夹角可以不高于90度。
在一些实施例中，在第二磁性元件2908的位置处，所述第一全磁场的方向与第二磁性元件2908的磁化方向之间的夹角不高于90度。在一些实施例中，在第二磁性元件2908的位置处，第一磁性元件2902产生的磁场的方向与第二磁性元件2908的磁化方向之间的夹角可以是0度、10度、20度等小于或等于90度的夹角。又例如，第一磁性元件2902的磁化方向垂直于第一磁性元件2902 的下表面或上表面竖直向上(如图a方向所示)，第二磁性元件2908的磁化方向由第二磁性元件2908的外环指向内环(如图中c方向所示，在第一磁性元件2902的右侧，第一磁性元件2902的磁化方向沿着顺时针方向偏转270度)。
与单一磁性元件的磁路组件相比，磁路组件2900中的第一全磁场改变元件2906可以提高磁间隙中的总磁通量，进而增加磁间隙中的磁感应强度。并且，在第一全磁场改变元件2906的作用下，原本发散的磁感线会向磁间隙所在位置收敛，进一步增加磁间隙中的磁感应强度。
图31是根据本申请的一些实施例所示的一种磁路组件3000的纵截面示意图。如图31所示，在一些实施例中，磁路组件3000可以包括第一磁性元件2902、第一导磁元件2904、第一全磁场改变元件2906、第二磁性元件2908、第三磁性元件2910、第四磁性元件2912、第五磁性元件2916、第六磁性元件2918、第七磁性元件2920以及第二环形元件2922。第一磁性元件2902、第一导磁元件2904、第一全磁场改变元件2906、第二磁性元件2908、第三磁性元件2910、第三磁性元件2910、第四磁性元件2912以及第五磁性元件2916。在一些实施例中，第一全磁场改变元件2906和/或第二环形元件2922可以包括环形磁性元件或环形导磁元件。所述环形磁性元件可以包括本申请中描述的任意一种或几种磁铁材料，所述环形导磁元件可以包括本申请中描述的任意一种或几种导磁材料。
在一些实施例中，第六磁性元件2918可以连接第五磁性元件2916以及第二环形元件2922，第七磁性元件2920可以连接第三磁性元件2910以及第二环形元件2922。在一些实施例中，第一磁性元件2902、第五磁性元件2916、第二磁性元件2908、第三磁性元件2910、第四磁性元件2912、第六磁性元件2918和/或第七磁性元件2920与所述第一导磁元件2904、第一全磁场改变元件2906以及第二环形元件2922可以形成磁回路。
在一些实施例中，所述第一磁性元件2902的磁化方向与第六磁性元件2918的磁化方向之间的夹角可以在0度与180度之间。在一些实施例中，第一磁性元件2902的磁化方向与第六磁性元件2918的磁化方向与之间的夹角在45度与135度之间。在一些实施例中，所述第一磁性元件2902的磁化方向与第六磁性元件2918的磁化方向之间的夹角不高于90度。在一些实施例中，第一磁性元件2902的磁化方向垂直于第一磁性元件2902的下表面或上表面竖直向上(如图a方向所示)，第六磁性元件2918的磁化方向由第六磁性元件2918的外环指向内环(如图中f方向所示，在第一磁性元件2902的右侧，第一磁性元件2902的磁化方向沿着顺时针方向偏转270度)。在一些实施例中，在同一竖直方向上，第六磁性元件2918的磁化方向与第二磁性元件2908的磁化方向可以相同。在一些实施例中，第一磁性元件2902的磁化方向垂直于第一磁性元件2902的下表面或上表面竖直向上(如图a方向所示)，第七磁性元件2920的磁化方向由第七磁性元件2920的下表面指向上表面(如图中e方向所示，在第一磁性元件2902的右侧，第一磁性元件2902的磁化方向沿着顺时针方向偏转360度)。在一些实施例中，第七磁性元件2920的磁化方向与第四磁性元件2912的磁化方向可以相同。
在一些实施例中，在第六磁性元件2918的位置处，磁路组件2900产生的磁场的方向与所 述第六磁性元件2918的磁化方向之间的夹角不高于90度。在一些实施例中，在第六磁性元件2918的位置处，第一磁性元件2902产生的磁场的方向与第六磁性元件2918的磁化方向之间的夹角可以是0度、10度、20度等小于或等于90度的夹角。
在一些实施例中，所述第一磁性元件2902的磁化方向与第七磁性元件2920的磁化方向之间的夹角可以在0度与180度之间。在一些实施例中，第一磁性元件2902的磁化方向与第七磁性元件2920的磁化方向与之间的夹角在45度与135度之间。在一些实施例中，所述第一磁性元件2902的磁化方向与第七磁性元件2920的磁化方向之间的夹角不高于90度。
在一些实施例中，在第七磁性元件2920的位置处，磁路组件3000产生的磁场的方向与所述第七磁性元件2920的磁化方向之间的夹角不高于90度。在一些实施例中，在第七磁性元件2920的位置处，第一磁性元件2902产生的磁场的方向与第七磁性元件2920的磁化方向之间的夹角可以是0度、10度、20度等小于或等于90度的夹角。
在一些实施例中，第一全磁场改变元件2906可以是环形磁性元件。在这种情况下，第一全磁场改变元件2906的磁化方向可以与第二磁性元件2908或第四磁性元件2912的磁化方向相同。例如，在第一磁性元件2902的右侧，第一全磁场改变元件2906的磁化方向可以由第一全磁场改变元件2906的外环指向内环。在一些实施例中，第二环形元件2922可以是环形磁性元件。在这种情况下，第二环形元件2922的磁化方向可以与第六磁性元件2918或第七磁性元件2920的磁化方向相同。例如，在第一磁性元件2902的右侧，第二环形元件2922的磁化方向可以由第二环形元件2922的外环指向内环。
在磁路组件3000中，多个磁性元件可以提高总的磁通量，不同磁性元件相互作用，可以抑制磁感线泄漏，提高磁间隙处的磁感应强度，提高扬声组件的灵敏度。
图32是根据本申请的一些实施例所示的一种磁路组件3100的纵截面示意图。如图32所示，磁路组件3100可以包括第一磁性元件3102、第一导磁元件3104、第二导磁元件3106以及第二磁性元件3108。
在一些实施例中，第一磁性元件3102和/或第二磁性元件3108可以包括本申请中描述的任意一种或几种磁铁。在一些实施例中，第一磁性元件3102可以包括第一磁铁，第二磁性元件3108可以包括第二磁铁，所述第一磁铁与所述第二磁铁可以相同或不同。第一导磁元件3104和/或第二导磁元件3106可以包括本申请中描述的任意一种或几种导磁材料。第一导磁元件3104和/或第二导磁元件3106的加工方法可以包括本申请中描述的任意一种或几种加工方式。在一些实施例中，第一磁性元件3102、第一导磁元件3104和/或第二磁性元件3108可以设置为轴对称结构。例如，第一磁性元件3102、第一导磁元件3104和/或第二磁性元件3108可以是圆柱体。在一些实施例中，第一磁性元件3102、第一导磁元件3104和/或第二磁性元件3108可以是共轴的圆柱体，含有相同或者不同的直径。第一磁性元件3102的厚度可以大于或等于第二磁性元件3108的厚度。在一些实施例中，第二导磁元件3106可以是凹槽型结构。所述凹槽型结构可以包含U型的剖面。所述凹槽型的第二导磁元件3106可以包括底板和侧壁。在一些实施例中，所述底板和所述侧壁可以是一体成型 的，例如，所述侧壁可以由底板在垂直于底板的方向进行延伸形成。在一些实施例中，所述底板可以通过本申请中描述的任意一种或几种连接方式连接所述侧壁。第二磁性元件3108可以设定为环状或片状。关于第二磁性元件3108的形状可参考说明书中其他地方的描述。在一些实施例中，第二磁性元件3108可以与第一磁性元件3102和/或第一导磁元件3104共轴。
第一磁性元件3102的上表面可以连接第一导磁元件3104的下表面。第一磁性元件3102的下表面可以连接第二导磁元件3106的底板。第二磁性元件3108的下表面连接第一导磁元件3104的上表面。第一磁性元件3102、第一导磁元件3104、第二导磁元件3106和/或第二磁性元件3108之间的连接方式可以包括粘接、卡接、焊接、铆接、螺栓连接等一种或多种组合。
第一磁性元件3102、第一导磁元件3104和/或第二磁性元件3108与第二导磁元件3106的侧壁之间形成磁间隙。音圈可以设置于所述磁间隙中。在一些实施例中，第一磁性元件3102、第一导磁元件3104、第二导磁元件3106以及第二磁性元件3108可以形成磁回路。在一些实施例中，磁路组件3100可以产生第一全磁场，第一磁性元件3102可以产生第二磁场。所述第一全磁场由所述磁路组件3100中的所有组分(例如，第一磁性元件3102，第一导磁元件3104、第二导磁元件3106以及第二磁性元件3108)产生的磁场共同形成。所述第一全磁场在所述磁间隙内的磁场强度(也可以被称为磁感应强度或者磁通量密度)大于所述第二磁场在所述磁间隙内的磁场强度。在一些实施例中，第二磁性元件3108可以产生第三磁场，所述第三磁场可以提高所述第二磁场在所述磁间隙处的磁场强度。
在一些实施例中，第二磁性元件3108的磁化方向与第一磁性元件3102的磁化方向之间的夹角在90度与180度之间。在一些实施例中，第二磁性元件3108的磁化方向与第一磁性元件3102的磁化方向之间的夹角在150度与180度之间。在一些实施例中，第二磁性元件3108的磁化方向与第一磁性元件3102的磁化方向相反(如图所示，a方向与b方向)。
与单一磁性元件的磁路组件相比，磁路组件3100增加了第二磁性元件3108。第二磁性元件3108磁化方向与第一磁性元件3102磁化方向相反，可以抑制第一磁性元件3102在磁化方向上的漏磁，从而使第一磁性元件3102产生的磁场可以较多地被压缩到磁间隙中，因而提高磁间隙内的磁感应强度。
需要注意的是，以上对扬声组件装置的描述仅仅是具体的示例，不应被视为是唯一可行的实施方案。显然，对于本领域的专业人员来说，在了解扬声组件装置的基本原理后，可能在不背离这一原理的情况下，对实施扬声组件装置的具体方式与步骤进行形式和细节上的各种修正和改变，但是这些修正和改变仍在以上描述的范围之内。例如，磁路组件中的磁性元件不限于上述的第一磁性元件、第二磁性元件、第三磁性元件、第四磁性元件、第五磁性元件、第六磁性元件、第七磁性元件，还可以增加或减少磁性元件的数量。诸如此类的变形，均在本申请的保护范围之内。
在一些实施例中，以上描述的扬声组件装置也可以通过气传导的方式将声音传递给用户。当采用气传导的方式传递声音时，所述扬声组件装置可以包括一个或多个声源。所述声源可以位于用户头部的特定位置，例如，头顶、额头、脸颊、鬓角、耳廓、耳廓背面等，而不用堵塞或者覆盖 耳道。出于描述的目的，图33显示一种通过气传导的方式传递声音的示意图。
如图33所示，声源3310和声源3320可以产生相位相反的声波(图中以“+”和“-”表示相位相反)。为简单起见，这里所说的声源指的是扬声组件装置上输出声音的出声孔。例如，所述声源3310和声源3320可以是分别位于眼镜上特定位置(例如，图16中外壳104，或者电路壳体)的两个出声孔。
在一些实施例中，声源3310和声源3320可以由同一个振动装置3301产生。所述振动装置3301包括振膜(未显示在图中)。当所述振膜受到电信号驱动而振动时，振膜正面驱动空气振动，通过导声通道3312在出声孔处形成声源3310，振膜背面驱动空气振动，通过导声通道3322在出声孔处形成声源3320。所述导声通道指的是振膜到对应出声孔的声音传播路径。在一些实施例中，所述导声通道是由扬声组件上特定结构(例如，图16中外壳104，或者电路壳体)围成的路径。需要知道的是，在一些可替代的实施例中，声源3310和声源3320还可以由不同的振动装置，分别通过不同的振膜振动产生。
由声源3310和声源3320产生的声音中，一部分传递给用户耳朵形成用户听到的声音，另一部分传递到环境中形成漏音。考虑到声源3310和声源3320距离用户耳朵的位置较近，为了描述方便，所述传递到用户耳朵的声音可以称为近场声音，所述传递到环境中的漏音可以称为远场声音。在一些实施例中，所述扬声组件装置产生的不同频率的近场/远场声音与声源3310和声源3320之间的间距有关。一般说来，扬声组件装置产生的近场声音会随着两个声源之间间距的增大而增大，而产生的远场声音(漏音)会随着频率的增加而增大。
针对不同频率的声音，可以分别设计声源3310和声源3320之间的间距，使得扬声组件装置产生的低频近场声音(例如，频率小于800Hz的声音)尽可能大，且高频远场声音(例如，频率大于2000Hz的声音)尽可能小。为了达到以上目的，所述扬声组件装置中可以包括两组或两组以上的双声源，每组双声源包含类似于声源3310和声源3320的两个声源，并分别产生特定频率的声音。具体地，第一组双声源可以用于产生低频声音，第二组双声源可以用产生高频声音。为了获得较大的低频近场声音，第一组双声源中两个声源之间的距离可以设置为较大的值。并且由于低频信号的波长较长，双声源之间较大的距离不会在远场形成过大的相位差，因而也不会在远场中形成过多的漏音。为了使得高频远场声音较小，第二组双声源中两个声源之间的距离可以设置为较小的值。由于高频信号的波长较短，双声源之间较小的距离可以避免在远场形成大的相位差，因而可以避免形成大的漏音。所述第二组双声源之间的距离小于所述第一组双声源之间的距离。
本申请实施例可能带来的有益效果包括但不限于：(1)本申请中在铰链臂受到外力作用而相对铰链座进行转动时，铰链具有适当程度的跳变，从而为用户使用提供便利。(2)通过调整面板103的法线A或面板与人体皮肤接触面的法线A’与装置驱动力所在直线B之间的夹角θ可以改善扬声组件的音质；(3)通过提高壳体整体刚度，外壳面板和外壳背面能够在较高的频率下保持相同或者基本相同的振动幅度和相位，从而减小扬声组件装置的漏音；(4)通过在磁路组件中增设磁性元件、导磁元件和导电元件，可以提高扬声组件装置的灵敏度。需要说明的是，不同实施例可能产 生的有益效果不同，在不同的实施例里，可能产生的有益效果可以是以上任意一种或几种的组合，也可以是其他任何可能获得的有益效果。
上文已对基本概念做了描述，显然，对于本领域技术人员来说，上述发明披露仅仅作为示例，而并不构成对本申请的限定。虽然此处并没有明确说明，本领域技术人员可能会对本申请进行各种修改、改进和修正。该类修改、改进和修正在本申请中被建议，所以该类修改、改进、修正仍属于本申请示范实施例的精神和范围。
同时，本申请使用了特定词语来描述本申请的实施例。如“一个实施例”、“一实施例”和/或“一些实施例”意指与本申请至少一个实施例相关的某一特征、结构或特点。因此，应强调并注意的是，本说明书中在不同位置两次或多次提及的“一实施例”或“一个实施例”或“一替代性实施例”并不一定是指同一实施例。此外，本申请的一个或多个实施例中的某些特征、结构或特点可以进行适当的组合。
此外，本领域技术人员可以理解，本申请的各方面可以通过若干具有可专利性的种类或情况进行说明和描述，包括任何新的和有用的工序、机器、产品或物质的组合或对他们的任何新的和有用的改进。相应地，本申请的各个方面可以完全由硬件执行、可以完全由软件(包括固件、常驻软件、微码等)执行、也可以由硬件和软件组合执行。以上硬件或软件均可被称为“模块”、“单元”、“组件”或“系统”。此外，本申请的各方面可能表现为位于一个或多个计算机可读介质中的计算机产品，该产品包括计算机可读程序编码。
此外，除非权利要求中明确说明，本申请所述处理元素和序列的顺序、数字字母的使用或其他名称的使用，并非用于限定本申请流程和方法的顺序。尽管上述披露中通过各种示例讨论了一些目前认为有用的发明实施例，但应当理解的是，该类细节仅起到说明的目的，附加的权利要求并不仅限于披露的实施例，相反，权利要求旨在覆盖所有符合本申请实施例实质和范围的修正和等价组合。例如，虽然以上所描述的系统组件可以通过硬件设备实现，但是也可以只通过软件的解决方案得以实现，如在现有的服务器或移动设备上安装所描述的系统。
同理，应当注意的是，为了简化本申请披露的表述，从而帮助对一个或多个发明实施例的理解，前文对本申请实施例的描述中，有时会将多种特征归并至一个实施例、附图或对其的描述中。但是，这种披露方法并不意味着本申请对象所需要的特征比权利要求中提及的特征多。实际上，实施例的特征要少于上述披露的单个实施例的全部特征。
一些实施例中使用了描述成分、属性数量的数字，应当理解的是，此类用于实施例描述的数字，在一些示例中使用了修饰词“大约”、“近似”或“大体上”等来修饰。除非另外说明，“大约”、“近似”或“大体上”表明所述数字允许有±20％的变化。相应地，在一些实施例中，说明书和权利要求中使用的数值数据均为近似值，该近似值根据个别实施例所需特点可以发生改变。在一些实施例中，数值数据应考虑规定的有效数位并采用一般位数保留的方法。尽管本申请一些实施例中用于确认其范围广度的数值域和数据为近似值，在具体实施例中，此类数值的设定在可行范围内尽可能精确。
最后，应当理解的是，本申请中所述实施例仅用以说明本申请实施例的原则。其他的变形也可能属于本申请的范围。因此，作为示例而非限制，本申请实施例的替代配置可视为与本申请的教导一致。相应地，本申请的实施例不仅限于本申请明确介绍和描述的实施例。

Claims (27)

  1. 一种眼镜，其特征在于，所述眼镜包括：
    眼镜架，所述眼镜架包括眼镜框以及两条眼镜腿，所述两条眼镜腿分别与所述眼镜框转动连接；
    两个扬声组件，所述两个扬声组件分别通过所述两条眼镜腿上的铰链组件连接到两条眼镜腿上，且所述铰链组件能够转动以改变每个扬声组件相对于其所连接的眼镜腿的位置，所述两个扬声组件包括耳机芯和耳机壳体，所述耳机壳体包括面向人体一侧的外壳面板和与所述外壳面板相对的外壳背面；以及
    所述两条眼镜腿中的至少一条容纳控制电路或电池，所述控制电路或电池驱动所述耳机芯振动以产生声音，所述耳机芯的振动导致所述外壳面板和所述外壳背面振动，所述外壳面板的振动具有第一相位，所述外壳背面的振动具有第二相位，其中，所述外壳面板的振动和所述外壳背面的振动频率在2000Hz到3000Hz时，所述第一相位和所述第二相位的差值的绝对值小于60度。
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的眼镜，其特征在于，铰链组件包括铰链、杆状件和固定件；所述铰链包括：
    铰链座；
    铰链臂，所述铰链臂与所述铰链座通过转轴转动连接，所述铰链臂受到外力作用时能够相对所述铰链座转动，以改变所述扬声组件相对于眼镜腿的位置；
    支撑件，所述支撑件活动设置于所述铰链座上；
    弹性件，所述弹性件用于将所述支撑件朝向所述铰链臂进行弹性偏置，以使得所述支撑件能够弹性抵接于所述铰链臂上。
  3. 根据权利要求2所述的眼镜，其特征在于，
    所述铰链臂上包括彼此连接的第一支撑面和第二支撑面；
    所述支撑件上包括第三支撑面；
    所述弹性件将所述支撑件朝向所述铰链臂进行弹性偏置时，使得所述第三支撑面能够分别弹性抵接于所述第一支撑面和第二支撑面上；
    在所述铰链臂受到外力作用而相对所述铰链座进行转动时，由所述第一支撑面和所述第二支撑面的连接处推动所述支撑件克服所述弹性件的弹性偏置而反向移动，进而使得所述第三支撑面从与所述第一支撑面和所述第二支撑面中的一者弹性抵接切换到与所述第一支撑面和所述第二支撑面中的另一者弹性抵接。
  4. 根据权利要求3所述的眼镜，其特征在于，在垂直于所述转轴的中轴线的截面上，所述转轴到所述连接处的最大距离与所述转轴到所述第一支撑面的最短距离之间的比例介于1.1和1.5之间。
  5. 根据权利要求3所述的眼镜，其特征在于，当所述第三支撑面从与所述第一支撑面弹性抵接 切换到与所述第二支撑面弹性抵接时，所述铰链座与所述铰链臂之间的夹角变小。
  6. 根据权利要求3所述的眼镜，其特征在于，所述第三支撑面从与所述第一支撑面弹性抵接切换到与所述第二支撑面弹性抵接时所需的外力不同于所述第三支撑面从与所述第二支撑面弹性抵接切换到与所述第一支撑面弹性抵接时所需的外力。
  7. 根据权利要求3所述的眼镜，其特征在于，在垂直于所述转轴的中轴线的截面上，所述连接处呈弧形设置。
  8. 根据权利要求7所述的眼镜，其特征在于，所述连接处呈圆弧设置，且所述圆弧的曲率介于5与30之间。
  9. 根据权利要求3所述的眼镜，其特征在于，在垂直于所述转轴的中轴线的截面上，所述第一支撑面和所述第二支撑面之间的夹角为钝角。
  10. 根据权利要求3所述的眼镜，其特征在于，
    所述铰链座包括座本体以及从所述座本体凸出且彼此间隔设置的第一凸耳和第二凸耳；
    所述铰链臂包括臂本体以及从所述臂本体凸出设置的第三凸耳，所述第三凸耳插入至所述第一凸耳和第二凸耳之间的间隔区域，并通过所述转轴与所述第一凸耳和第二凸耳转动连接。
  11. 根据权利要求10所述的眼镜，其特征在于，
    所述支撑件至少部分设置于所述间隔区域内且位于所述第三凸耳朝向所述座本体的一侧；
    所述座本体上设置有与所述间隔区域连通的容置腔，所述弹性件设置于所述容置腔内，并将所述支撑件朝向所述第三凸耳进行弹性偏置。
  12. 根据权利要求1所述的眼镜，其特征在于，所述外壳面板的振动具有第一振幅，所述外壳背面的振动具有第二振幅，所述第一振幅和所述第二振幅的比值在0.5到1.5的范围之内。
  13. 根据权利要求1所述的眼镜，其特征在于，所述外壳面板的振动产生第一漏音声波，所述外壳背面的振动产生第二漏音声波，所述第一漏音声波和所述第二漏音声波相互叠加，所述叠加减小了所述第一漏音声波的幅值。
  14. 根据权利要求1所述的眼镜，其特征在于，所述外壳面板与所述外壳其它部分通过胶水、卡接、焊接或螺纹连接中的一种或任意几种的组合进行连接。
  15. 根据权利要求1所述的眼镜，其特征在于，所述外壳面板和所述外壳背面由纤维增强塑料材料制成。
  16. 根据权利要求1所述的眼镜，其特征在于，所述耳机芯振动能够产生驱动力；
    所述外壳面板与所述耳机芯具有传动连接；所述外壳面板的全部或局部用于与使用者身体接触或抵靠，以传导声音；
    所述外壳面板上用于与使用者身体接触或抵靠的区域具有法线，所述驱动力所在直线与所述法线不平行。
  17. 根据权利要求16所述的眼镜，其特征在于，设定所述驱动力所在直线具有经面板指向扬声组件外的正方向，设定所述法线具有指向扬声组件外的正方向，则两条直线在其正方向上的夹角为锐角。
  18. 根据权利要求16所述的眼镜，其特征在于，所述耳机芯包括线圈以及磁路系统，所述线圈与所述磁路系统的轴线与所述法线不平行；
    所述轴线与所述线圈径向平面和/或所述磁路系统径向平面垂直。
  19. 根据权利要求16所述的眼镜，其特征在于，所述驱动力在XOY平面坐标系的第一象限和/或第三象限内具有分量；其中，
    XOY平面坐标系的原点o位于扬声组件与人体接触面上，X轴与人体冠状轴平行，Y轴与人体矢状轴平行，且X轴正方向朝向人体外侧，y轴正方向朝向人体前方。
  20. 根据权利要求16所述的眼镜，其特征在于，所述外壳面板上用于与使用者身体接触或抵靠的区域包括平面或准平面。
  21. 根据权利要求1所述的眼镜，其特征在于，所述耳机芯还包括磁路组件，所述磁路组件产生第一磁场，所述磁路组件包括：
    第一磁性元件，所述第一磁性元件产生第二磁场；
    第一导磁元件；以及
    至少一个第二磁性元件，所述至少一个第二磁性元件环绕所述第一磁性元件，并与所述第一磁性元件之间形成磁间隙，所述第一磁场在所述磁间隙内的磁场强度大于所述第二磁场在所述磁间隙内的磁场强度。
  22. 根据权利要求21所述的眼镜，其特征在于，进一步包括：
    第二导磁元件；以及
    至少一个第三磁性元件，其中，所述至少一个第三磁性元件连接所述第二导磁元件和所述至少一个第二磁性元件。
  23. 根据权利要求22所述的眼镜，其特征在于，进一步包括：
    至少一个第四磁性元件，其中，所述至少一个第四磁性元件位于所述磁间隙的下方并连接所述第一磁性元件以及所述第二导磁元件。
  24. 根据权利要求21所述的眼镜，其特征在于，进一步包括：
    至少一个第五磁性元件，其中，所述至少一个第五磁性元件连接所述第一导磁元件的上表面。
  25. 根据权利要求24所述的眼镜，其特征在于，进一步包括：
    第三导磁元件，其中，所述第三导磁元件连接所述第五磁性元件的上表面，所述第三导磁元件被配置为抑制所述第一磁场的场强泄露。
  26. 根据权利要求22所述的眼镜，其特征在于，所述第一导磁元件连接所述第一磁性元件的上表面，所述第二导磁元件包括底板和侧壁，以及所述第一磁性元件连接所述第二导磁元件的底板。
  27. 根据权利要求22所述的眼镜，其特征在于，进一步包括：
    至少一个导电元件，其中，所述导电元件连接所述第一磁性元件、所述第一导磁元件，或所述第二导磁元件中的至少一个元件。
PCT/CN2019/102395 2018-08-24 2019-08-24 一种眼镜 WO2020038483A1 (zh)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US17/138,956 US12013596B2 (en) 2018-08-24 2020-12-31 Glasses

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201810975515.1A CN108873372B (zh) 2018-08-24 2018-08-24 一种铰链及眼镜
CN201810975515.1 2018-08-24

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US17/138,956 Continuation US12013596B2 (en) 2018-08-24 2020-12-31 Glasses

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2020038483A1 true WO2020038483A1 (zh) 2020-02-27

Family

ID=64321580

Family Applications (6)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2019/102377 WO2020038474A1 (zh) 2018-08-24 2019-08-24 一种扬声器
PCT/CN2019/102395 WO2020038483A1 (zh) 2018-08-24 2019-08-24 一种眼镜
PCT/CN2019/102394 WO2020038482A1 (zh) 2011-12-23 2019-08-24 一种眼镜
PCT/CN2019/102396 WO2020038484A1 (zh) 2018-08-24 2019-08-24 一种眼镜
PCT/CN2019/102385 WO2020038477A1 (zh) 2018-08-24 2019-08-24 一种眼镜
PCT/CN2019/102389 WO2020038479A1 (zh) 2018-08-24 2019-08-24 一种眼镜

Family Applications Before (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2019/102377 WO2020038474A1 (zh) 2018-08-24 2019-08-24 一种扬声器

Family Applications After (4)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2019/102394 WO2020038482A1 (zh) 2011-12-23 2019-08-24 一种眼镜
PCT/CN2019/102396 WO2020038484A1 (zh) 2018-08-24 2019-08-24 一种眼镜
PCT/CN2019/102385 WO2020038477A1 (zh) 2018-08-24 2019-08-24 一种眼镜
PCT/CN2019/102389 WO2020038479A1 (zh) 2018-08-24 2019-08-24 一种眼镜

Country Status (3)

Country Link
US (7) US20210072559A1 (zh)
CN (1) CN108873372B (zh)
WO (6) WO2020038474A1 (zh)

Families Citing this family (28)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN108873372B (zh) 2018-08-24 2024-06-14 深圳市韶音科技有限公司 一种铰链及眼镜
US11611834B2 (en) 2011-12-23 2023-03-21 Shenzhen Shokz Co., Ltd. Bone conduction speaker and compound vibration device thereof
US11575994B2 (en) 2011-12-23 2023-02-07 Shenzhen Shokz Co., Ltd. Bone conduction speaker and compound vibration device thereof
US11582565B2 (en) 2014-01-06 2023-02-14 Shenzhen Shokz Co., Ltd. Systems and methods for suppressing sound leakage
US11558698B2 (en) 2014-01-06 2023-01-17 Shenzhen Shokz Co., Ltd. Systems and methods for suppressing sound leakage
US12013538B2 (en) 2017-07-03 2024-06-18 Holovisions LLC Augmented reality (AR) eyewear with a section of a fresnel reflector comprising individually-adjustable transmissive-reflective optical elements
US11509994B2 (en) 2018-04-26 2022-11-22 Shenzhen Shokz Co., Ltd. Vibration removal apparatus and method for dual-microphone earphones
WO2020038488A1 (zh) 2018-08-24 2020-02-27 深圳市韶音科技有限公司 一种眼镜
US11835798B2 (en) 2018-12-12 2023-12-05 Solos Technology Limited Eyewear systems, apparatuses, and methods for providing assistance to a user
US11871174B1 (en) * 2018-12-12 2024-01-09 Solos Technology Limited Personalized directional audio for head-worn audio projection systems, apparatuses, and methods
WO2020140456A1 (zh) 2019-01-05 2020-07-09 深圳市韶音科技有限公司 一种扬声器装置
KR102533570B1 (ko) 2019-04-30 2023-05-19 썬전 샥 컴퍼니 리미티드 음향 출력 장치
TWI761685B (zh) * 2019-06-24 2022-04-21 緯創資通股份有限公司 穿戴式顯示裝置
CN110259384B (zh) * 2019-07-25 2024-04-19 桂林航天工业学院 一种移动式工程钻机底盘
GB2611937A (en) * 2020-06-23 2023-04-19 Aftab Syed Eyewear, method of manufacture and use thereof
CN112135216A (zh) * 2020-10-16 2020-12-25 深圳市喜来喜科技有限公司 一种可适配不同头型的蓝牙耳机
CN115373153A (zh) * 2021-05-19 2022-11-22 深圳市韶音科技有限公司 一种可穿戴设备
TWI757075B (zh) * 2021-01-28 2022-03-01 藝高國際光電有限公司 眼鏡組合結構
JP7480428B2 (ja) * 2021-02-10 2024-05-09 シェンツェン・ショックス・カンパニー・リミテッド 聴覚補助装置
US11965539B2 (en) * 2021-07-22 2024-04-23 Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc Anti-creep anti-back-out compact fastener
TWI783619B (zh) * 2021-08-09 2022-11-11 鄭溪州 藍芽耳機及結合有藍芽耳機之物件
USD1022019S1 (en) * 2021-09-15 2024-04-09 Shenzhen Shokz Co., Ltd. Glasses with headphones
USD1022016S1 (en) * 2021-09-15 2024-04-09 Shenzhen Shokz Co., Ltd. Glasses with headphones
USD1022011S1 (en) 2021-09-15 2024-04-09 Shenzhen Shokz Co., Ltd. V-shaped part of glasses with headphones
USD1022020S1 (en) * 2021-09-15 2024-04-09 Shenzhen Shokz Co., Ltd. Glasses with headphones
USD1022018S1 (en) * 2021-09-15 2024-04-09 Shenzhen Shokz Co., Ltd. Glasses with headphones
USD1022017S1 (en) * 2021-09-15 2024-04-09 Shenzhen Shokz Co., Ltd. Glasses with headphones
USD1022023S1 (en) 2021-09-15 2024-04-09 Shenzhen Shokz Co., Ltd. Endpieces of glasses with headphones

Citations (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US4902120A (en) * 1988-11-22 1990-02-20 Weyer Frank M Eyeglass headphones
WO1996023373A1 (en) * 1995-01-25 1996-08-01 Philip Ashley Haynes Communication method
WO2006023341A2 (en) * 2004-08-11 2006-03-02 Davenport Kevin E Audio eyeglasses
WO2007070508A2 (en) * 2005-12-13 2007-06-21 Marcio Marc Abreu Biologically fit wearable electronics apparatus and methods
CN108873372A (zh) * 2018-08-24 2018-11-23 深圳市韶音科技有限公司 一种铰链及眼镜
CN208847977U (zh) * 2018-08-24 2019-05-10 深圳市韶音科技有限公司 一种眼镜
CN209120433U (zh) * 2018-06-15 2019-07-16 深圳市韶音科技有限公司 一种骨传导扬声器
CN110022516A (zh) * 2018-01-08 2019-07-16 深圳市韶音科技有限公司 一种骨传导扬声器

Family Cites Families (114)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US2327320A (en) 1941-11-12 1943-08-17 Sonotone Corp Amplifying hearing aid
JPS59161928A (ja) 1983-03-04 1984-09-12 Miyota Seimitsu Kk ラジオ付きメガネの配置構造
US4791673A (en) 1986-12-04 1988-12-13 Schreiber Simeon B Bone conduction audio listening device and method
CA2059597A1 (en) * 1991-01-22 1992-07-23 Paul A. Vogt Radio eyewear
CA2071040A1 (en) * 1992-06-11 1993-12-12 Jacob Gluz Earphone-type speaker assembly
US5745209A (en) * 1996-08-22 1998-04-28 California Design Studio Inc. Double piston spring hinge for hingeably connecting temples to an eyeglass frame
US6850138B1 (en) 1999-12-02 2005-02-01 Nec Tokin Corporation Vibration actuator having an elastic member between a suspension plate and a magnetic circuit device
KR100344091B1 (ko) 2000-04-18 2002-07-24 주식회사 도우미텍 골도 진동자 및 이것을 이용한 골도 스피커 헤드셋
US7150526B2 (en) * 2000-06-02 2006-12-19 Oakley, Inc. Wireless interactive headset
US7461936B2 (en) * 2000-06-02 2008-12-09 Oakley, Inc. Eyeglasses with detachable adjustable electronics module
US20120105740A1 (en) * 2000-06-02 2012-05-03 Oakley, Inc. Eyewear with detachable adjustable electronics module
US6409338B1 (en) * 2000-09-25 2002-06-25 Frank Saleem Jewell Air-generating audible spectacles device
ITBL20010014A1 (it) * 2001-07-11 2003-01-11 Dot S A S Di Dioguardi Franco Cerniera elastica con occhiello a piano inclinato, particolarmente per la chiusura automatica delle astine degli occhiali
FR2838530B1 (fr) * 2002-04-12 2004-06-18 Chevassus Charniere elastique comprenant une butee radiale de sur-ouverture
JP2004274593A (ja) 2003-03-11 2004-09-30 Temuko Japan:Kk 骨伝導スピーカ
US7760898B2 (en) * 2003-10-09 2010-07-20 Ip Venture, Inc. Eyeglasses with hearing enhanced and other audio signal-generating capabilities
EP1621043A4 (en) 2003-04-23 2009-03-04 Rh Lyon Corp METHOD AND DEVICE FOR TRANSFERRED TRANSMISSION WITH MINIMUM INTERFERENCE THROUGH BACKGROUND NOISE AND MINIMUM LOCAL ACOUSTIC RADIATION
CN2639920Y (zh) * 2003-07-29 2004-09-08 黄陈才 眼镜架弹性铰链
US7079876B2 (en) * 2003-12-23 2006-07-18 Isaac Levy Wireless telephone headset built into eyeglasses
US7289767B2 (en) * 2004-01-16 2007-10-30 Chia Song Lai Wireless communication glasses
EP1718043A4 (en) 2004-02-20 2007-02-28 Temco Japan BONE LINE HANDSET
JP2006157318A (ja) * 2004-11-29 2006-06-15 Nec Tokin Corp 骨伝導スピーカーユニット
US20060158608A1 (en) * 2005-01-19 2006-07-20 Chung-Hung Lin Eyeglasses with signal receiving function
JP4631070B2 (ja) 2005-05-23 2011-02-16 並木精密宝石株式会社 骨伝導スピーカ
US7784935B2 (en) * 2006-01-20 2010-08-31 Jackson Michael T Eyewear with removable audio system
JP2007251358A (ja) 2006-03-14 2007-09-27 Nec Tokin Corp 骨伝導スピーカ
WO2007107985A2 (en) 2006-03-22 2007-09-27 David Weisman Method and system for bone conduction sound propagation
US7261411B1 (en) * 2006-05-04 2007-08-28 Chih-Chang Huang Eyeglasses structure
JP4992062B2 (ja) * 2006-05-17 2012-08-08 キム、スング−ホー 骨伝導ヘッドセット
WO2007140368A2 (en) * 2006-05-30 2007-12-06 Sonitus Medical, Inc. Methods and apparatus for processing audio signals
KR101135396B1 (ko) 2006-07-03 2012-04-17 아이필유(주) 다기능 초소형 스피커
TW200804887A (en) * 2006-07-12 2008-01-16 Jia-Lin Jou Slim frame of spectacle having electronic device thereon, and spectacle having the same
JPWO2008029515A1 (ja) 2006-09-07 2010-01-21 株式会社テムコジャパン 骨伝導スピーカ
US7380935B2 (en) 2006-09-12 2008-06-03 Chic Optic, Inc. Mechanical universal hinge
US8391534B2 (en) 2008-07-23 2013-03-05 Asius Technologies, Llc Inflatable ear device
DE102007051959A1 (de) * 2007-10-29 2009-05-14 Carl Zeiss Ag Anzeigevorrichtung
US8270637B2 (en) 2008-02-15 2012-09-18 Sonitus Medical, Inc. Headset systems and methods
WO2010046988A1 (ja) 2008-10-23 2010-04-29 パイオニア株式会社 スピーカ装置
CN101753221A (zh) 2008-11-28 2010-06-23 新兴盛科技股份有限公司 蝶颞骨传导通讯与/或助听装置
GB2476033A (en) * 2009-12-04 2011-06-15 Marcus Lewis Personal audio equipment device
ITPD20100056U1 (it) * 2010-07-15 2012-01-16 Visottica Ind Spa Cerniera per occhiali
IT1402353B1 (it) * 2010-09-17 2013-08-30 Ideal Srl Cerniera elastica miniaturizzata, in particolare per occhiali.
CN201984240U (zh) 2011-01-31 2011-09-21 雅视光学有限公司 一种眼镜的铰接装置
CN102141688B (zh) 2011-03-30 2012-08-22 黄维克 一种可容纳排线或柔性线路板的镜架铰链
CN202364340U (zh) 2011-08-05 2012-08-01 歌尔声学股份有限公司 一种硅麦克风阵列的固定机构及蓝牙耳机
JP5667018B2 (ja) 2011-09-06 2015-02-12 Kddi株式会社 携帯電話端末、携帯電話端末の音声伝達方法、携帯電話端末の音声伝達プログラム
US9350832B2 (en) 2011-09-30 2016-05-24 Kyocera Corporation Mobile electronic device
JP5926950B2 (ja) 2011-12-22 2016-05-25 京セラ株式会社 電子機器
CN102497612B (zh) * 2011-12-23 2013-05-29 深圳市韶音科技有限公司 一种骨传导扬声器及其复合振动装置
JP5812925B2 (ja) 2012-04-12 2015-11-17 京セラ株式会社 電子機器
US8798292B2 (en) * 2012-06-06 2014-08-05 Google Inc. External vibration reduction in bone-conduction speaker
CN202679440U (zh) 2012-06-08 2013-01-16 瑞声光电科技(常州)有限公司 带骨传导功能的通信装置
JP6006598B2 (ja) 2012-09-27 2016-10-12 京セラ株式会社 電子機器
US20140125942A1 (en) * 2012-11-06 2014-05-08 Wen-Tse HUANG Temple Folding Structure on a Pair of Eyeglasses
US20140185822A1 (en) * 2012-12-28 2014-07-03 Panasonic Corporation Bone conduction speaker and bone conduction headphone device
US8965012B1 (en) * 2013-02-27 2015-02-24 Google Inc. Smart sensing bone conduction transducer
US20140253867A1 (en) * 2013-03-05 2014-09-11 Tao Jiang Pair of Projector Glasses
CN103167390B (zh) 2013-04-09 2017-04-19 苏州逸巛声学科技有限公司 具有气导作用的骨传导受话器
WO2015020753A2 (en) 2013-08-09 2015-02-12 Otorix Usa Inc. Bone conduction hearing aid system
CN103428601A (zh) 2013-08-19 2013-12-04 倪晓旺 一种基于双声道骨传导技术的智能眼镜
KR101467500B1 (ko) * 2013-08-21 2014-12-01 주식회사 예일전자 감각신호출력장치
CN203786416U (zh) * 2013-10-24 2014-08-20 玉环富华眼镜有限公司 一种眼镜用弹性铰链
ITMI20131797A1 (it) * 2013-10-29 2015-04-30 Buhel S R L Trasduttore elettromagnetico per generare vibrazioni per la conduzione ossea di suoni e/o parole
CN106303861B (zh) 2014-01-06 2018-06-12 深圳市韶音科技有限公司 一种能够抑制漏音的骨传导扬声器
CN103792683B (zh) 2014-01-26 2015-04-08 杭州双弯月电子科技有限公司 骨传导蓝牙眼镜
KR101514677B1 (ko) 2014-01-28 2015-05-20 주식회사 예일전자 골전도 출력장치
US9675259B2 (en) 2014-03-12 2017-06-13 Cheng Uei Precision Industry Co., Ltd. Physiological function detecting earphone and detecting method thereof
EP3149967B1 (en) * 2014-05-27 2020-10-28 Sophono, Inc. Systems, devices, components and methods for reducing feedback between microphones and transducers in bone conduction magnetic hearing devices
CN204119448U (zh) 2014-08-25 2015-01-21 钟小燕 骨传导耳机设备以及应用骨传导耳机设备的眼镜架和服饰
CN204374548U (zh) 2015-01-21 2015-06-03 郭钧 智能蓝牙眼镜
CN106954155B (zh) 2015-08-13 2019-08-16 深圳市韶音科技有限公司 骨传导扬声器
CN204887455U (zh) 2015-08-13 2015-12-16 深圳市韶音科技有限公司 一种改善骨传导扬声器音质的骨传导扬声器
CN107209373B (zh) 2015-09-27 2020-07-28 深圳市柔宇科技有限公司 头戴式显示设备
CN205103503U (zh) * 2015-11-25 2016-03-23 温州市益大眼镜有限公司 一种双芯内定位弹性镜腿
CN205176414U (zh) 2015-12-04 2016-04-20 深圳市易特科信息技术有限公司 带有骨传导耳机的运动型太阳眼镜
CN205301727U (zh) * 2015-12-29 2016-06-08 高正生 一种弹性眼镜脚
CN106974645A (zh) * 2016-01-22 2017-07-25 周常安 眼镜式脑部活动传感器以及眼镜式电生理活动感测装置
CN210835473U (zh) 2016-01-22 2020-06-23 周常安 耳戴式电极结构以及穿戴式生理感测装置
WO2017196294A1 (en) * 2016-05-09 2017-11-16 Oakley, Inc. Modular wearable electronic devices, systems, and methods
CN205793159U (zh) 2016-05-24 2016-12-07 广东伟旺达科技股份有限公司 一种动圈与压电一体式耳机
CN205720956U (zh) * 2016-06-08 2016-11-23 王泽玲 一种无线骨传导眼镜
CN205961389U (zh) * 2016-08-29 2017-02-15 张灿锋 一种骨传导耳机及带有骨传导耳机的眼镜
CN206061075U (zh) 2016-09-06 2017-03-29 深圳市凯狮博电子有限公司 一种智能蓝牙耳机
CN206421112U (zh) 2016-10-18 2017-08-18 深圳市看见智能科技有限公司 转轴构件改良型智能眼镜
KR101819530B1 (ko) * 2016-11-02 2018-01-17 주식회사 정글 골전도 스피커가 장착된 안경 다리
DE102016222098A1 (de) * 2016-11-10 2018-05-17 Airbus Operations Gmbh Lautsprecheranordnung für eine Passagierkabine eines Transportmittels
CN206292473U (zh) * 2016-11-25 2017-06-30 陈光华 一种带骨传导功能的眼镜腿、眼镜及眼镜盒
CN206387972U (zh) 2016-12-30 2017-08-08 杨启鹏 一种眼镜用弹簧铰链
CN206365029U (zh) 2016-12-30 2017-07-28 歌尔丹拿音响有限公司 扬声器
CN206920741U (zh) * 2017-01-16 2018-01-23 张�浩 骨传导眼镜
CN206563855U (zh) * 2017-03-22 2017-10-17 深圳市型社眼镜有限公司 一种眼镜弹性铰链及眼镜架
CN206640748U (zh) 2017-03-22 2017-11-14 北京金锐德路科技有限公司 脖戴式语音交互智能设备
CN110463221B (zh) * 2017-04-04 2022-07-15 索尼公司 耳机及眼镜
KR102302328B1 (ko) * 2017-08-18 2021-09-15 엘지전자 주식회사 휴대용 음향기기
CN207424414U (zh) 2017-09-19 2018-05-29 浙江帝力眼镜股份有限公司 一种眼镜
CN207443120U (zh) * 2017-09-28 2018-06-01 盐城宝丰磁电有限公司 一种防水扬声器结构
US20190204617A1 (en) * 2017-12-29 2019-07-04 Zungle Inc. Wearable device
CN110022503A (zh) * 2018-01-08 2019-07-16 深圳市韶音科技有限公司 骨传导发声装置
CN207718105U (zh) * 2018-01-08 2018-08-10 深圳市韶音科技有限公司 骨传导眼镜
CN107948881A (zh) 2018-01-08 2018-04-20 深圳市韶音科技有限公司 一种骨传导扬声器
CN207720370U (zh) * 2018-01-08 2018-08-10 深圳市韶音科技有限公司 骨传导发声装置
US10555071B2 (en) * 2018-01-31 2020-02-04 Bose Corporation Eyeglass headphones
CN108391188B (zh) * 2018-02-11 2020-02-21 维沃移动通信有限公司 一种扬声器组件及电子设备
CN208780925U (zh) 2018-08-24 2019-04-23 深圳市韶音科技有限公司 一种眼镜
CN208780924U (zh) 2018-08-24 2019-04-23 深圳市韶音科技有限公司 一种眼镜
CN109061902A (zh) * 2018-08-24 2018-12-21 深圳市韶音科技有限公司 一种电子组件及眼镜
CN108845436A (zh) 2018-08-24 2018-11-20 深圳市韶音科技有限公司 一种眼镜
CN208847981U (zh) * 2018-08-24 2019-05-10 深圳市韶音科技有限公司 一种铰链及眼镜
CN209267805U (zh) 2019-01-05 2019-08-16 深圳市韶音科技有限公司 骨传导耳机芯及骨传导扬声装置
CN208780926U (zh) * 2018-08-24 2019-04-23 深圳市韶音科技有限公司 一种铰链及眼镜
CN208780932U (zh) * 2018-08-24 2019-04-23 深圳市韶音科技有限公司 一种电子组件及眼镜
CN114721164A (zh) 2018-08-24 2022-07-08 深圳市韶音科技有限公司 眼镜及转轴和连接线的组件
CN209184747U (zh) * 2019-01-05 2019-07-30 深圳市韶音科技有限公司 骨传导扬声装置
CN117793593A (zh) 2019-01-05 2024-03-29 深圳市韶音科技有限公司 骨传导扬声装置

Patent Citations (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US4902120A (en) * 1988-11-22 1990-02-20 Weyer Frank M Eyeglass headphones
WO1996023373A1 (en) * 1995-01-25 1996-08-01 Philip Ashley Haynes Communication method
WO2006023341A2 (en) * 2004-08-11 2006-03-02 Davenport Kevin E Audio eyeglasses
WO2007070508A2 (en) * 2005-12-13 2007-06-21 Marcio Marc Abreu Biologically fit wearable electronics apparatus and methods
CN110022516A (zh) * 2018-01-08 2019-07-16 深圳市韶音科技有限公司 一种骨传导扬声器
CN209120433U (zh) * 2018-06-15 2019-07-16 深圳市韶音科技有限公司 一种骨传导扬声器
CN108873372A (zh) * 2018-08-24 2018-11-23 深圳市韶音科技有限公司 一种铰链及眼镜
CN208847977U (zh) * 2018-08-24 2019-05-10 深圳市韶音科技有限公司 一种眼镜

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN108873372A (zh) 2018-11-23
US12013596B2 (en) 2024-06-18
US20210124184A1 (en) 2021-04-29
US20210211790A1 (en) 2021-07-08
US12007625B2 (en) 2024-06-11
WO2020038482A1 (zh) 2020-02-27
US20210124185A1 (en) 2021-04-29
WO2020038477A1 (zh) 2020-02-27
US11650431B2 (en) 2023-05-16
US20210116724A1 (en) 2021-04-22
CN108873372B (zh) 2024-06-14
US11960147B2 (en) 2024-04-16
US20210072559A1 (en) 2021-03-11
WO2020038474A1 (zh) 2020-02-27
US20230273454A1 (en) 2023-08-31
WO2020038479A1 (zh) 2020-02-27
US20210165243A1 (en) 2021-06-03
WO2020038484A1 (zh) 2020-02-27

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2020038483A1 (zh) 一种眼镜
US11805354B2 (en) Loudspeaker apparatus
WO2020140447A1 (zh) 一种扬声器装置
US11940670B2 (en) Eyeglasses
WO2019237727A1 (zh) 一种骨传导扬声器及耳机
WO2020140449A1 (zh) 一种扬声器装置
US11825259B2 (en) Speaker device
WO2020140458A1 (zh) 一种扬声器装置
US20230292034A1 (en) Speaker device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 19852949

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 19852949

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1